Panasonic KX-TA624 Telephone User manual

Advanced Hybrid System

Installation Manual

Model No.

KX-TA624

Please read this manual before connecting the Advanced Hybrid System.

2

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic Model KX-TA624,

Advanced Hybrid System.

System Components

Service Unit

Telephone

Optional

Equipment

Model

KX-TA624

KX-T7130

KX-T7020

KX-T7030

KX-T7050

KX-T7055

KX-TA62460

KX-TA62470

KX-TA62477

KX-TA62491

KX-TA62493

KX-T30865

KX-T30890

KX-T7090

Description

Advanced Hybrid System (Main Unit)

Proprietary telephone with display

Proprietary telephone

Proprietary telephone with display



Doorphone/Door Opener Card

8 Extension Expansion Card

3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card

OGM/FAX Detection Card

Caller ID Card

Doorphone

Headset (Earphone type)

Headset (Headphone type)

System Components Table

Attention

• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Advanced Hybrid System.

• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 ˚C {104 ˚F}) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.

• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired. If the telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the trouble is in the telephone system, and not in the unit.

• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

WARNING

THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS

BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD

IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.

DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING

THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND

RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.

THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR

SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN

EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING

TO REGULATIONS.

THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE,

ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE

EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.

TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the side of the unit. You should note the model number and the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft.

MODEL NO.:

SERIAL NO.:

3

4

Attention

When you ship the product

Carefully pack and send it prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton.

Attach a postage-paid letter, detailing the symptom, to the outside of the carton. DO NOT send the product to the Executive or Regional Sales offices. They are NOT equipped to make repairs.

Product service

Panasonic Factory Servicenters for this product are listed in the servicenter directory.

Consult your authorized Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER’S ADDRESS

For your future reference

DEALER’S TEL NO.

Important Safety Instructions

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

3. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

4. Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.

5. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

6. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register.

This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

7. This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.

8. This product is equipped with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.

9. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by people walking on it.

10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

5

6

Important Safety Instructions

11. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used.

13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

A. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

B. If liquid has been spilled into the product.

C. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

D. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

E. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Telephone Company and F.C.C.

Requirements and Responsibilities

1. Notification to the Telephone Company

Customers, before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network, shall upon request of the

Telephone Company, inform the Telephone Company of the particular line(s) to which such connection is made, the F.C.C. registration number (see the label on the bottom of the unit) and ringer equivalence number (REN) of the registered terminal equipment.

The REN is useful in determining the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN’s of all devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area.

2. Connection to Telephone Line

This unit must not be connected to a coin operated line. If you are on a party line, check with your local telephone company.

3. Incidence of Harm to the Telephone Lines

Should terminal equipment cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company shall, where practical, notify the customer that temporary discontinuance of service may be required.

However, where prior notice is not practical, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such action is reasonable in the circumstances. In case of such unnotified temporary discontinuance of service, the telephone company shall:

(a) Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance of service.

(b) Afford the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise to the temporary discontinuance.

(c) Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication

Commission pursuant to the procedures set out in Subpart E of Part 68 of FCC Telephone

Equipment Rules.

4. Compatibility of the Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment

(a) Availability of telephone interface information.

Technical information concerning interface parameters and specifications not specified in FCC Rules, including the number of Ringers which may be connected to a particular telephone line, which is needed to permit Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner compatible with Telephone Company communications facilities, shall be provided by the Telephone Company upon customer’s request.

(b) Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities, Equipment, Operations and Procedures.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68.

If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone Company Communications Facilities, or require modification or alteration of such Terminal Equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

7

8

Telephone Company and F.C.C.

Requirements and Responsibilities

Notify the Telephone Company

Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer.

Before connecting this equipment to any telephone, call the telephone company and inform them of the following:

• Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected

• Make

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR Panasonic

• Model RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR KX-TA624

• FCC Registration No. RRRRRRRRRRRR found on the side of the unit

• Ringer Equivalence No. RRRRRRRRRRR found on the side of the unit

• Facility Interface Code RRRRRRRRRRR 02LS2

• Service Order Code RRRRRRRRRRRR 9.0F

• Required Network Interface Jack RRRRRRR RJ 11

Note :

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution:

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this device.

When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers:

1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.

2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.

Introduction

This Installation Manual provides technical information for the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid

System, KX-TA624. It is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the system and includes a description of the system, its hardware and software, features and services and environmental requirements.

This manual contains the following sections.

Section 1, System Outline

Provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications.

Section 2, Installation

Contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to install the optional cards and units.

Section 3, Features

Describes all the basic, optional and programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides information about the programming required, conditions, connection references, related features and operation for every feature.

Section 4, System Programming

Provides step-by-step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone.

Section 5, List

Lists the tone/ring tone and default values for system programming.

Section 6, Troubleshooting

Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.

Section 7, Programming Tables

Provides a hard copy reference for entering user-programmed data.

NOTE

The following document may be used in conjunction with this manual.

• User Manual for the KX-TA624 System, Proprietary Telephones and Single Line

Telephones

9

Contents

Section 1 System Outline

1.1

System Highlights RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-2

1.2

Basic System Construction

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-3

1.3

Proprietary Telephones RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-3

1.4

Options RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-4

1.4.1

3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) RRRRRRR 1-4

1.4.2

8 Extension Expansion Card (KX-TA62470) RRRRRRRRRRR 1-4

1.4.3

Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-4

1.4.4

OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491) RRRRRRRRRRR 1-4

1.4.5

Doorphone/Door Opener Card (KX-TA62460) RRRRRRRRRR 1-5

1.4.6

DSS Console (KX-T7040) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-5

1.5

Specifications RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-6

1.5.1

General Description

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-6

1.5.2

Characteristics RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-7

1.5.3

System Capacity RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 1-8

Section 2 Installation

2.1

Before Installation RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-2

2.2

Installation of the Main Unit RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-4

2.2.1

Unpacking RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-4

2.2.2

Location of Interfaces RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-4

2.2.3

Wall Mounting

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-5

2.2.4

Frame Ground Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-6

2.3

Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-7

2.3.1

System Connection Diagram RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-7

2.3.2

Opening the Front Cover RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-8

2.3.3

Outside (CO) Line Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-9

2.3.4

Extension Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-12

2.3.5

External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection RRRRRRRRR 2-13

2.3.6

External Music Source Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-14

2.3.7

Paralleled Telephone Connection

(for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone) RRRR 2-15

2.3.8

Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection RRRRRRRRRRRR 2-16

2.3.9

Printer and PC Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-17

2.4

Installation of Optional Cards RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-20

2.4.1

Location of Optional Cards RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-20

2.4.2

Caller ID and OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation RRRRRRR 2-21

2.4.3

Doorphone and Door Opener Connection

RRRRRRRRRRR 2-23

2.4.4

Installing a 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 Extension Expansion Card (KX-TA62470)

RRRRRRR 2-28

2.4.5

Securing the cords RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-33

2.5

Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer RRRRRRRR 2-34

2.6

Closing the Front Cover RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-35

2.7

Starting the System for the First Time RRRRRRRRRRRR 2-36

2.8

System Restart RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-37

2.9

System Data Clear

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 2-38

10

Contents

Section 3 Features

A

B

C

D

Absent Message Capability RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-2

Account Code Entry RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-3

Answering, Direct Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-4

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-5

Background Music (BGM) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-6

Busy Lamp Field RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-7

Busy Station Signaling (BSS) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-7

Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-8

Button, Flexible RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-9

Button, Group-CO (G-CO) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-11

Button, Other-CO (O-CO) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-12

Button, Single-CO (S-CO) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-13

Buttons on Proprietary Telephones RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-14

Caller ID RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-16

CALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY RRRRRRRRRRR 3-17

Call Forwarding – All Calls RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-17

Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-18

Call Forwarding – Follow Me RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-19

Call Forwarding – to an Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-20

Call Hold – Intercom RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-21

Call Hold – Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-22

Call Hold, Exclusive – Intercom RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-23

Call Hold, Exclusive – Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-23

Call Hold Retrieve – Intercom

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-24

Call Hold Retrieve – Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-24

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection RRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-25

Call Log, Incoming RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-26

Call Park RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-27

Call Pickup, Directed RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-28

Call Pickup, Group RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-28

Call Pickup Deny

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-29

Call Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) RRRRRRR 3-29

Call Splitting RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-30

CALL TRANSFER FEATURES – SUMMARY RRRRRRRRRRRR 3-31

Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-31

Call Transfer, Screened – to an Outside (CO) Line

RRRRRRRRRRR 3-32

Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-33

Call Waiting

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-34

Call Waiting from a Central Office RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-35

Conference RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-36

Conference, Unattended RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-37

Confirmation Tones RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-38

Data Line Security RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-40

Dial Tones, Distinctive RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-41

Dial Type Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-42

Direct In Lines (DIL) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-43

11

12

Contents

E

F

H

I

L

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-44

Display, Call Information RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-50

Display, in Idle

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-51

Display, Self-Extension Number RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-52

Display Contrast Adjustment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-52

Do Not Disturb (DND) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-53

Do Not Disturb (DND) Override

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-53

Door Opener RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-54

Doorphone Call RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-55

DSS Console (KX-T7040) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-56

Electronic Station Lockout RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-58

Emergency Call RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-59

End-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through) RRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-59

Executive Busy Override – Extension

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-60

Executive Busy Override – Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-61

Extension Group RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-62

External Feature Access RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-63

Facsimile Detection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-64

Flash RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-64

Handset/Headset Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-65

Hands-free Answerback RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-65

Hands-free Operation RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-66

Hold Alarm/Hold Recall RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-67

Host PBX Access RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-68

Intercept Routing RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-69

Intercom Calling RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-70

LED Indication, Intercom RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-71

LED Indication, Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-72

Limited Call Duration RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-73

Line Access, Automatic RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-74

Line Access, Direct RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-75

Line Access, Individual RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-76

Line Access, Outside (CO) Line Group RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-77

Line Preference – Incoming (No Line/Prime Line/Ringing Line) RRRRRR 3-78

Line Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line/No Line/Prime Line) RRRRRRRR 3-79

Live Call Screening (LCS) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-80

Lockout RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-81

Log-In/Log-Out RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-82

M

Manager Extension RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-83

Message Waiting RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-84

Microphone Mute RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-85

Mixed Station Capacities

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-85

O

Module Expansion RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-86

Music on Hold RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-87

One-Touch Dialing RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-88

One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-89

Operator RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-90

Contents

P

R

S

Operator Call RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-90

Outgoing Message (OGM) RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-91

Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-94

Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing RRRRRRRRR 3-94

Outside (CO) Line Group RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-95

PAGING FEATURES – SUMMARY RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-96

Paging – All

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-96

Paging – External RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-97

Paging – Group RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-97

Paralleled Telephone RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-98

Pause Insertion, Automatic RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-99

Personal Speed Dialing RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-100

Pickup Dialing RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-101

Power Failure Transfer RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-102

Pulse to Tone Conversion RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-103

Redial, Last Number RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-104

Redial, Saved Number RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-104

Remote Station Lock Control RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-105

Ring Group RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-106

Ringing, Delayed RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-106

Ringing, Discriminating RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-107

Ringing Pattern Selection for Intercom Calls and Outside (CO) Lines RRR 3-108

Ringing Tone Selection for Doorphones RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-109

Room Monitor RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-110

Secret Dialing RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-111

Station Feature Clear RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-112

Station Hunting RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-113

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-114

Station Programming

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-116

Station Programming Data Default Set RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-117

T

System Data Default Set RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-118

System Programming with a Proprietary Telephone

RRRRRRRRRR 3-118

System Speed Dialing RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-119

Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-120

Time-Out, Variable RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-122

Timed Reminder RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-124

Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call) RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-124

Toll Restriction RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-125

Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-131

Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-132

Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes RRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-133

Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class RRRRRRRRRRRR 3-135

V

Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVS50 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-136

Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100 RRRRRRRRRR 3-141

Volume Control – Handset Receiver/Headset/Ringer/Speaker RRRRRRR 3-145

W

Walking COS

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 3-146

13

Contents

Section 4 System Programming

4.1

General Programming Instructions RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-2

4.1.1

Using Proprietary Telephones RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-3

4.1.2

Programming Methods RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-5

4.1.3

Entering Characters RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-6

4.1.4

Programming Example


4.2

System Programming RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-9

[000] Date and Time Setting RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-9

[001] System Speed Dialing Entry RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-11

[002] System Password RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-13

[003] DSS Console Port Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-14

[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console RRRRRRRRR 4-15

[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button RRRRRRRRRRRR 4-16

[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode RRRRRRRR 4-17

[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time RRRRRRRRRRR 4-18

[008] Operator Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-20

[009] Extension Number Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-21

[010] LCD Time Display Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-22

[100] Hunting Group Set RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-23

[101] Station Hunting Type RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-24

[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100 RRRRRRRRRR 4-25

[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100 RRRRRRRRR 4-26

[104] Hold Mode Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-28

[105] Conference Tone


[106] External Paging Access Tone RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-30

[107] DTMF Receiver Check RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-31

[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension RRRRRRRRRRR 4-32

[109] CO Indicator Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-33

[110] Flash Key Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-34

[111] Hold Music Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-35

[112] DSS Console Indication Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-36

[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-37

[117] Call Pickup Tone RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-38

[118] Pulse Restriction


[119] Redialing After Pulse to Tone Conversion RRRRRRRRRRRR 4-40

[125] Toll Restriction Check for and # RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-41

[130] Voice Mail 1 APT Port for KX-TVS50 RRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-42

[131] Voice Mail 2 APT Port for KX-TVS50 RRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-43

[200] Hold Recall Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-44

[201] Transfer Recall Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-45

[202] Call Forwarding Start Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-46

[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-47

[204] Call Duration Count Start Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-48

[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit RRRRR 4-49

[206] Dialing Start Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-50

[208] Interdigit Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-51

14

Contents

[211] No Dial Disconnection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-52

[300] Carrier Code Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-53

[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class RRRRR 4-54

[302]–[305] Toll Restriction — Class 2 – 5 Denied Codes RRRRRRRR 4-55

[306] Toll Restriction — Exception Codes RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-56

[309] Emergency Dial Number Set RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-57

[310] Account Codes RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-58

[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-59

[312] Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class RRRRRRRRR 4-60

[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment RRRRRRRRRRR 4-61

[401] Dial Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-62

[402] Pulse Speed Selection


[403] Host PBX Access Codes RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-64

[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-66

[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch RR 4-67

[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch RRRRRR 4-68

[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch RRRRRR 4-70

[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch RRRRRRRR 4-72

[417] Pause Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-74

[418] Flash Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-75

[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access

RRRRRRRR 4-76

[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-77

[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls

RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-79

[422] Disconnect Time


[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection RRRRRRRRRR 4-81

[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection RRRRRRRRRRRR 4-82

[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-83

[502] OGM Mode Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-84

[503] FAX Connection


[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-86

[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-87

[506] DISA Busy Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-88

[507] DISA Intercept Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-89

[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-90

[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-91

[510] DISA No Dial Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-92

[511] DISA Security Type RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-93

[512] DISA Security Codes RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-94

[513] Cyclic Tone Detection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-95

[514] FAX Tone Detection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-96

[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-97

[516] DISA Incoming Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-98

[517] DISA AA Wait Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-99

[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code RRRRRRRRRR 4-100

[600] Extension Group Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-101

[601]–[603] TRS – Class of Service (COS) Assignment

— Day/Night/Lunch RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-102

15

Contents

[604] Extension Name Setting RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-103

[605] Account Code Entry Mode RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-104

[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-106

[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line RRRRRRRRRRR 4-107

[608] Executive Busy Override RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-108

[609] Do Not Disturb Override RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-109

[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-110

[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension RRRRRRRR 4-111

[612] Room Monitor Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-112

[617] Wireless PT Port Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-113

[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch RRRR 4-114

[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch RRRRRRR 4-115

[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection

RRRRRRRRRR 4-116

[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-117

[708] Doorphone Ringing Time

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-118

[709] Door Opener Time RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-119

[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters RRRRRRRRRR 4-120

[801] SMDR Parameter RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-122

[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing RRRRRRRRR 4-123

[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing Printing RRRRRRRR 4-124

[804] System Data Dump RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-125

[805] SMDR Account Code Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-127

[900] Caller ID Assignment RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-128

[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment

RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-129

[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls RRRRRRRRRRRR 4-130

[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls RRRRRRRRR 4-131

[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-132

[906] Caller ID SMDR Format RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-133

[998] ROM Version RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-134

[999] System Data Clear RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 4-135

Section 5 List

5.1

Tone/Ring Tone

RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 5-2

5.2

Default Values RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 5-4

Section 6 Troubleshooting

6.1

Installation RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 6-2

6.2

Connection RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 6-3

6.3

Operation RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 6-4

Section 7 Programming Tables

16

Section 1

System Outline

This section provides general information on the system, including system capacity and specifications.

1.1

System Highlights

System Capacity

Outside (CO) line

Extension

Basic System

3

8

Module Expansion

3

16

Paralleled Telephone Connection

Every jack in the system also supports the parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line device. They share the same extension number and are considered by the system to be one extension.

Hybrid System

This system supports the connection of analog proprietary telephones and single line devices such as single line telephones, fax machines, and data terminals.

Proprietary Telephones (PT)

The system supports five different models of analog proprietary telephones which range from a set with a monitor to a set with a display and speakerphone button.

Programming System

The system is programmed from a proprietary telephone.

Voice Mail Integration

The system supports Voice Processing Systems with in-band

DTMF signaling as well as APT Integration. The Panasonic Voice

Processing System provides automated attendant, voice mail, interview and custom services.

Caller ID

Allows the user to see the name or telephone number of a caller on the telephone display before answering a call.

Remote Station Lock Control

Allows an operator or manager to lock an extension so that outgoing calls cannot be made.

1-2 System Outline

1.2

Basic System Construction

The KX-TA624 Advanced Hybrid System has a basic capacity of three outside (CO) lines and eight extensions. It is capable of supporting Panasonic analog proprietary telephones, and single line devices such as single line telephones and a fax machine.

To expand its capabilities, the system can be equipped with optional components or customer-supplied peripherals such as an external speaker and external music source (e.g. a radio).

1.3

Proprietary Telephones

The following Panasonic proprietary telephones are available for use with this system.

Proprietary

Telephone Description

KX-T7130 Display, speakerphone, 12 Flexible CO, 12 PF

KX-T7020 Speakerphone, 12 Flexible CO, 4 PF

KX-T7030 Display, speakerphone, 12 Flexible CO, 4 PF

KX-T7050 Monitor, 12 Flexible CO, 4 PF

KX-T7055 Monitor, 3 Flexible CO, 3 PF

Note:

Flexible CO: Flexible CO button (programmable)

PF: Programmable Feature button

System Outline 1-3

1.4

Options

1.4.1

3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card (KX-TA62477)

Adds three outside (CO) lines (outside (CO) lines 4 through 6) and eight extensions (JACK 09 through 16).

1.4.2

8 Extension Expansion Card (KX-TA62470)

Adds eight extensions (JACK 17 through 24).

1.4.3

Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493)

This card supports the following.

Caller ID: Receives the Caller ID Service from the Central Office.

A specified display proprietary telephone with Caller

ID service can display the information. It can also display caller’s information which has been stored in the system according to the Caller ID service.

Up to two cards can be installed to the system. One Caller ID card supports three outside (CO) lines.

1.4.4

OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491)

This card supports the following. There are two circuits, therefore up to two calls can be received simultaneously.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) with an OGM:

One of the system features. An outgoing message greets the external caller and provides information so that the caller can access the extension(s) directly.

Facsimile detection:

When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by DISA, it automatically connects the specified facsimile extension.

Central

Office

Outside (CO) Line

External Telephone

1-4 System Outline

1.4.5

Doorphone/Door Opener Card (KX-TA62460)

This card supports four doorphones and four door openers. The doorphone is optional (KX-T30865).

Panasonic Panasonic

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2

Panasonic Panasonic

Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

Door

Opener 1

Door

Opener 2

Door

Opener 3

Door

Opener 4

1.4.6

DSS Console (KX-T7040)

Allows easy and quick access to stations and features. The Busy

Lamp Field shows the idle or busy status of each station. DSS

Consoles are designed for use with a proprietary telephone. The system supports up to two DSS Consoles per system.

Paired Telephone

(Proprietary Telephone)

DSS Console

KX-T7040

Pair

Panasonic

System Outline 1-5

1.5

Specifications

1.5.1

General Description

System Capacity

Outside (CO) Lines 3 max. (6 max. with a 3 CO Line and 8 EXT

Extensions

Expansion Card)

8 max. (24 max. with a 3 CO Line and 8 EXT

Expansion Card and 8 Extension Expansion

Card)

Control Method

CPU: 16 bit CPU

Control ROM: 4 Mbit, Control RAM; 1 Mbit

Switching

Power Supplies

Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch

Primary 120 V AC, 60 Hz (1.2 A)

Secondary Circuit Volt: +5 V, +26 V

Dialing

Intercom Paths

Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps, Tone (DTMF) Dialing, DTMF-DP

4

Connector

Outside (CO) Lines 2-pin Modular Connector (RJ11)

Extensions/Doorphone 4-pin Modular Connector

Pager/Music Source EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (two-conductor,

ø 3.5 mm in diameter)

Extension Connection Cable

Single Line Telephone

KX-T7020

KX-T7030

KX-T7050

KX-T7055

KX-T7130

1 pair wire (T, R)

2 pair wire (T, R, H, L)

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Interface Serial Interface (RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)

Output Equipment Printer

Recording Details Date, Time, Extension Number, Outside

(CO) Line Number, Dialed Number, Call

Duration, Account Code, Caller ID

1-6 System Outline

1.5.2

Characteristics

Station Loop Limit

KX-T7020 / KX-T7030 / KX-T7050 /

KX-T7055 / KX-T7130

RRRRRRRRRRRRRR 40

Ω

Single Line Telephone RRRRRRRRR 600

Ω including set

Doorphone RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR 20

Ω

Minimum Leakage Resistance

15 000 ohms

Maximum Number of Station Instruments per Line

1 for a KX-T7130, KX-T7020, KX-T7030, KX-T7050, KX-T7055 or single line telephone

2 by Parallel Connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone

Ring Voltage

80 Vrms at 20 Hz depending on the Ringing Load

Central Office Loop Limit

1 600 ohms max.

Environmental Requirements

0 °C – 40 °C {32 °F – 104 °F},

10 % – 90 % relative humidity

Hookswitch Flash Time Range

204 ms – 1 000 ms

System Outline 1-7

1.5.3

System Capacity

Lines, Cards, Station Equipment

Item

Service Units

Outside (CO) Lines

Extension Jacks

Max. Quantity

1

6

24

Station Terminals 48

3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card 1


Caller ID Card

1

2



Doorphones

Door Openers

External Pager

External Music Source

DSS Consoles

1

1

4

4

1

1

2

System Data

Item

Operator

System Speed Dialing

One-Touch Dialing

Personal Speed Dialing

Call Park Areas

Absent Messages

Toll Restriction Classes

Extension Groups

Message Waiting

Max. Quantity

1

100

24 per extension

(proprietary telephone)

10 per extension

10

6

5

8

8 per extension

(proprietary telephone)

1-8 System Outline

Section 2

Installation

This section contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to install the optional cards and units.

2.1 Before Installation

Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system and terminal equipment.

Safety Installation Instructions

When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Installation Precautions

This system is designed for wall mounting only. Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)

1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C – 40 °C {32 °F – 104 °F})

2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.

3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.

4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the system.

5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.

6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install the system in the same room with the above equipment.)

7. Install at least 1.8 m {6 feet} away from radios and televisions.

(Both the system and Panasonic proprietary telephones)

8. Do not obstruct area around the system (for reasons of maintenance and inspection — be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the system).

Wiring Precautions

Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:

1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.

2-2 Installation

2.1

Before Installation

2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on. Avoid wiring under carpets.

3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment. Otherwise, the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment.

4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of

(telephone) equipment such as single line telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, voice processing systems, etc., except Panasonic proprietary telephones (e.g.

KX-T7030, KX-T7130).

5. Unplug the system during wiring. After all of the wiring is completed, plug in the system.

6. Mis-wiring may cause the system to operate improperly. Refer to Section 6.1 “Installation” and Section 6.2 “Connection”.

7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again.

8. The system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.

Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.

9. Outside (CO) Lines should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to Section 2.3.3 “Outside (CO)

Line Connection – Installing Lightning Protectors”.

POWER

Side View

Warning: Static sensitive connectors

Warning:

Static sensitive devices are used. To protect printed circuit boards from static electricity, do not touch connectors indicated to the left. To discharge body static, touch ground or wear a grounding strap.

Installation 2-3

2.2

Installation of the Main Unit

2.2.1

Unpacking

Unpack the box and check the items below.

Main Unit

AC Cord

Screws (Wall Mounting)

Washers (Wall Mounting)

Pager Connector

Music Source Connector one one three three one one

2.2.2

Location of Interfaces

External Music Jack

Paging Jack

Extension Modular Jacks

Outside (CO) Line Modular Jacks

Strap (for cables)

POWER

Power Switch

Protective Earth Terminal

AC Inlet

Power Indicator

Side View

Serial Interface

Connector

(RS-232C)

2-4 Installation

2.2.3

Wall Mounting

This set is designed for wall mounting only. The wall where the main unit is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the main unit. If screws other than the ones supplied are used, use screws with the same diameter as the ones enclosed.

Mounting on a Wooden Wall

1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the screw positions.

Template

Mounting on a Concrete or Mortar

Wall

1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the screw positions.

2. Drill holes and drive the anchor plugs

(user-supplied) with a hammer, flush to the wall.

To the wall surface

Anchor Plug

Concrete Wall

6.4 mm

{1/4 inch}

29 mm

{1 1/8 inch}

2. Install the screws (included) into the wall.

Wooden

Wall

3. Install the screws (included) into the anchor plugs.

Drive the screw to this position

Drive the screw to this position

3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

4. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.

Installation 2-5

2.2.4

Frame Ground Connection

IMPORTANT!!!

Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground.

1. Loosen the screw.

2. Insert the grounding wire.

3. Tighten the screw.

4. Connect the grounding wire to the ground.

To the ground

Screw

In most of North America, the ground provided by the “Third wire ground” at the commercial power outlet will be satisfactory. However, in some cases this ground may be installed incorrectly.

Therefore, the following test procedure should be performed.

Test Procedure

1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a possible reading of up to 250 V AC.

2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage points on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be 108 V AC – 132 V AC.

3. Move one of the meter probes to the 3rd prong terminal (GND).

Either the same reading or a reading of 0 V should be obtained.

4. If a reading of 0 V at one terminal and a reading of 108 V AC – 132 V AC at the other terminal is not obtained, the outlet is not properly grounded.

This condition should be corrected by a qualified electrician (per article 250 of the National

Electrical Code).

5. If a reading of 0 V at one terminal and a reading of 108 V AC – 132 V AC at the other terminal is obtained, then set the meter to the “OHMS/RX1” scale, place one probe at the

GND Terminal and the other probe at the terminal which gave a reading of 0 V.

A reading of less than 1

Ω should be obtained.

If the reading is not obtained, the outlet is not adequately grounded. See a qualified electrician.

2-6 Installation

2.3

Connection

2.3.1

System Connection Diagram

: needs an Optional Card.

6 Outside (CO) Lines to outside (CO) lines 1 – 3 (initial) to outside (CO) lines 4 – 6 (additional)

(Lightning Protectors)

External Music Source

Printer or Computer

(one pair)

24 Extensions

Amplifier Speaker

Extension jacks 01 – 08 (initial)

Extension jacks 09 – 24 (additional)

(two pair)


(one pair)

Data Terminal

(one pair)

(two pair)

(two pair)

KX-T7020

KX-T7130

(two pair)

(two pair)

KX-T7040

Door Openers

Panasonic

Panasonic

Panasonic

Panasonic

Doorphones

KX-T30865

Cordless Phone

(one pair)

KX-T7030

(two pair)

KX-T7050

Telephone Answering Machine with Facsimile

(one pair)

Voice Processing System

KX-T7055

Note

• It is recommended that the extension of jack 01 is a display proprietary telephone.

• Parallel connection of telephones is possible. Refer to Section 2.3.7, “Paralleled Telephone Connection”.

Installation 2-7

2.3.2

Opening the Front Cover

1. Loosen the screw.

2. Remove the top front cover.

Screw

Top front cover

Note

The screw cannot be removed from the cover.

2-8 Installation

2.3.3

Outside (CO) Line Connection

Connection

1. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords

(2-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks on the system.

2. Connect the line cord to the terminal board or the modular jacks from the Central Office jack.

View of TEL Jack (Outside (CO) Line)

T: Tip

R: Ring

T R

To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office

POWER

Installation 2-9

2.3.3


Installing Lightning Protectors

A lightning protector is a device to be installed on an outside (CO) line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the equipment.

A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Problems due to lightning surges have been steadily increasing with the development of electronic equipment.

In many countries, there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m {33 feet} above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.

This system should be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, grounding (connection to earth ground) is very important to protect the system.

Recommended lightning protectors

• TELESPIKE BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)

• SPIKE BLOK MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.)

• Super MAX™ (PANAMAX)

• MP1 (ITW LINK)

Installation

CO

Lightning

Protectors

CO

Terminal

Board

CO

EXTN.

System

Protective

Earth

Terminal

EXTN.

TEL

EXTN.

TEL

Frame Ground

Ground

CO: Outside (CO) line

EXTN.: Extension line

TEL: Telephone

2-10 Installation

2.3.3


Installation of an Earth Rod

Lightning

Protectors

CO

Grounding Wire

System

(Underground)

Rod

1) Installation location of the earth rod

RR Near the protector

2) Check obstructions RRRRRRRRR None

3) Composition of the earth rod RRRRR Metal

4) Depth of the earth rod

RRRRRRR More than 50 cm

{20 inches}

5) Size of the grounding wire RRRRRR Thickness more than

16 AWG

Note

• The above example is only a recommendation.

• The length of the earth rod and required depth depend on the composition of the soil.

Installation 2-11

2.3.4

Extension Connection

Telephone Wiring

Note

Extension jacks 01 – 08 are for all kinds of telephones.

The maximum length of the extension line cord (twisted cable) which connects the system and the extension is as follows.

Diameter of the line Max. length

1798 m {5900 feet}

Single Line Telephone

22 AWG

(Station Loop Limit:

600

Ω including set)

24 AWG

26 AWG

Proprietary Telephone

22 AWG

(Station Loop Limit:

40

Ω

)

24 AWG

26 AWG

1128 m {3700 feet}

698 m {2290 feet}

360 m {1180 feet}

229 m {750 feet}

140 m {460 feet}

2 or 4-conductor wiring is required for each extension as listed below. There are four pins possible for connection: “T” (Tip),

“R” (Ring), “L” (Low) and “H” (High).

Telephone

Single line telephone


(e.g., KX-T7030, KX-T7130)

Wiring

1 pair wire (T, R)

2 pair wire (L, H, T, R)

• If a KX-TA62493 is installed;

Note the jack numbers for the facsimile and single line telephone which have Caller ID service.

• If a telephone or answering machine with an A-A1 relay is connected to the system, set the A-A1 relay switch on the telephone or answering machine to the OFF position.

Connection

Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4conductor wiring) into the modular jacks on the system.

View of TEL Jack (Extension)

H: High

T: Tip

R: Ring

L: Low

To extensions

(JACK 01–08)

POWER

2-12 Installation

2.3.5

External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection

One external pager (user-supplied) can be connected to the

KX-TA624 as illustrated below.

Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (two-conductor,

ø 3.5 mm in diameter).

• Output impedance: 600

Ω

Maximum length of the cable

AWG 18 – 22: Under 10 m {33 feet}

Paging Jack

PAGING

POWER

Amplifier

Paging Equipment

Speaker

Note

• To adjust the sound level of the pager, use the volume control on the amplifier.

Programming Reference


[106] External Paging Access Tone

Feature References


Paging – All

Paging – External

Installation 2-13

2.3.6

External Music Source Connection

One music source, such as a radio (user-supplied), can be connected to the KX-TA624 as illustrated below.

Insert the plug to the earphone/headphone jack on the external music source.

Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (two-conductor,

ø 3.5 mm in diameter).

• Input impedance: 8

Ω

Maximum length of the cable

AWG 18 – 22: Under 10 m {33 feet}

External Music Jack

POWER

EXT.

MUSIC

External Music source

Note

• System programming for the music source used for Music on Hold is required.

• To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold, use the volume control on the external music source.



[111] Hold Music Selection



Background Music (BGM)

Music on Hold

2-14 Installation

2.3.7

Paralleled Telephone Connection

(for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone)

Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone as follows.

Using a Modular T-Adaptor

Modular T-Adaptor

(Panasonic KX-J66 or USOC RJA2X)

4-conductor wiring cord

For a proprietary telephone:

Connect pins “T”, “R”, “H” and “L”.

2-conductor wiring cord

Connect pins “T” and “R”.

Proprietary Telephone



[610] Paralleled Telephone Connection

Feature Reference


Paralleled Telephone


Installation 2-15

2.3.8

Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection

Outside (CO) Line

Reverse here

Outside (CO) Line

Reverse here

If the telephone is polarity sensitive, follow the procedure below:

Extension

1

4

7

2

5

8

0

3

6

9

Extension

1

4

7 8

0

2

5

3

6

9

1. Complete all the required extension wiring.

2. Confirm that dialing can be done from all the extensions using a touch-tone telephone.

If dialing fails, the polarity between the extension and the system must be reversed.

3. Reverse as shown.

4. Unplug the system.

5. Connect all outside (CO) lines.

6. Confirm that dialing can be done on the following extension using a touch-tone telephone.

Extension (T, R) of jack 01: Outside

(CO) line 1

If dialing fails, the polarity between the system and the outside (CO) line must be reversed.

7. Reverse as shown.

8. Every time an extension telephone is replaced, repeat the procedure above.

2-16 Installation

2.3.9

Printer and PC Connection

A user-supplied printer or personal computer (PC) can be connected to the system. These are used to print out or refer to the

SMDR call records and system programming data.

Connect the printer cable or the PC cable to the Serial Interface

(RS-232C) connector. The cable must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m {6.5 feet}.

Serial Interface

(RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)

Printer or Computer

Arrange the cables so that the printer will be connected to the system as shown in the appropriate chart on the following page.

The pin configuration of the Serial Interface (RS-232C) Connector is as follows.

Pin no.

2 RXD

3

4

5

6

7

8

TXD

DTR

SG

DSR

RTS

CTS

Signal name

Received Data

Transmitted Data

Data Terminal Ready

Signal Ground

Data Set Ready

Request To Send

Clear To Send

BB

BA

CD

AB

CC

CA

CB

Circuit type

EIA CCITT

104

103

108.2

102

107

105

106

Installation 2-17

2.3.9


Connection Chart for a Printer / Personal Computer with the KX-TA624

If a printer or a PC with a 9-pin cable is connected, follow the chart below.

Circuit type

(EIA)

BB

BA

CD

AB

CC

CA

CB

System

Signal name

RXD

TXD

DTR

SG

DSR

RTS

CTS

Pin no.

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

5

6

3

4

7

8

9-pin Cable Printer/PC

Pin no.

Signal name

Circuit type

(EIA)

2 RXD BB

TXD

DTR

SG

DSR

RTS

CTS

BA

CD

AB

CC

CA

CB

If a printer or a PC with a 25-pin cable is connected, follow the chart below.

Circuit type

(EIA)

BB

BA

CD

AB

CC

CA

CB

System

Signal name

RXD

TXD

DTR

SG

DSR

RTS

CTS

Pin no.

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

20

7

5

6

8

25-pin Cable Printer/PC

Pin no.

Signal name

Circuit type

(EIA)

1

3

FG

RXD

AA

BB

2 TXD BA

DTR

SG

CTS

DSR

DCD

CD

AB

CB

CC

CF

2-18 Installation

2.3.9


Serial Interface (RS-232C) Signals

Frame Ground: FG

Connects the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.

Transmitted Data: SD (TXD) RRRRRRRR (output)

Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A “Mark” condition is held unless data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.

Received Data: RD (RXD) RRRRRRRRR (input)

Conveys signals from the printer.

Request to Send: RS (RTS) RRRRRRRRR (output)

This lead remains ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.

Clear To Send: CS (CTS)

RRRRRRRRR (input)

When the CS (CTS) circuit is ON, it indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS (CTS) circuit is OFF.

Data Set Ready: DR (DSR) RRRRRRRRR (input)

When the DR (DSR) circuit is ON, it indicates the printer is ready.

The DR (DSR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer.

Signal Ground: SG

Connects the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.

Data Terminal Ready: ER (DTR) RRRRRR (output)

This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON

LINE. The ER (DTR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer. It is switched

OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.

Data Carrier Detect: CD (DCD) RRRRRRR (input)

When ON, it indicates the data terminal (DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.

Programming References


[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters

[801] SMDR Parameter



Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Installation 2-19

2.4

Installation of Optional Cards

2.4.1

Location of Optional Cards

The location of the optional cards is shown below.

Precaution To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do not touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional cards. If accessing the part is required, wear a grounding strap.

3 CO Line and 8 EXT

Expansion Card

(KX-TA62477) or

8 Extension Expansion

Card (KX-TA62470)

Connector


(KX-TA62460) Connector

The front covers are open.

OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491)

Connector

Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493)

Connector

Note:

Power off the System, and unplug the AC cord before installing an optional card.

2-20 Installation

2.4.2

Caller ID and OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation

A Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493) and OGM/FAX Detection Card

(KX-TA62491) can be installed to the system.

The Caller ID Card supports the following.

Caller ID: Receives the Caller ID Service from the Central Office.

A display proprietary telephone with Caller ID service can display the information. It can also display caller’s information which has been stored in the system according to the Caller ID service.

The OGM/FAX Detection Card supports the following.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) with an OGM:

One of the system features. An outgoing message greets the external caller and gives information so that the caller can access the extension(s) directly.

Facsimile detection:

When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by

DISA, it automatically connects the specified facsimile extension.

1. Remove the two screws.

2. Open the bottom front cover.

Screws

Bottom front cover

Installation 2-21

2.4.2

Caller ID and OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation

3. Attach the optional cards.

Caller ID Card

(KX-TA62493)

Install the Caller ID Card for the KX-TA62477 here.


(KX-TA62491)

Note

Please do not damage this part.

4. Insert the flat cables to each card connector.

Flat cables

5. Close the cover.

Condition

• Be sure the frame of the main unit is connected to the ground. Refer to

Section 2.2.4 “Frame Ground Connection”.


See “Programming References” in Section 3, Features, Caller ID and

Direct Inward System Access (DISA).



Caller ID


Outgoing Message (OGM)

2-22 Installation

2.4.3

Doorphone and Door Opener Connection

Four doorphones (KX-T30865) and four door openers (usersupplied) can be installed.

Maximum cable length

The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line cord which connects the system is as follows.

Doorphone

(Station Loop

Limit: 20

Ω

)

Door Opener

Diameter of the line

22 AWG

24 AWG

26 AWG

22 AWG

Max. length

180 m {590 feet}

113 m {370 feet}

70 m {230 feet}

180 m {590 feet}

Installing the Doorphone

1. Loosen the screw to open the doorphone unit.

Panasonic

Screw

Screws

2. Attach the base cover to a wall using two screws.

Note

Two kinds of screws are included. Please choose the appropriate one depending on your type of wall.

Type 1: When a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall.

Type 2: When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall.

3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.

To the terminal box

4. Put the doorphone together and re-install the screw.

Installation 2-23

2.4.3


Doorphone/Door Opener Installation

Attach the Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the main unit, connect the cord to the doorphone/door opener card connector and secure the screw.

Screw

Doorphone Connectors

Door Opener Terminal


(KX-TA62460)


Card Connector

2-24 Installation

2.4.3


Wiring of the Doorphone

1. Connect the Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the terminal boxes using 4-conductor modular connectors.

2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.

3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal box.

View of Doorphone Connector Jack

Doorphone 2

Doorphone 1

Doorphone 4

Doorphone 3

4-conductor wiring is required.

Panasonic

Doorphone 1

(KX-T30865)

Yellow

Red

4-conductor wiring is required.

Panasonic

Doorphone 3

(KX-T30865)

Yellow

Red

Black

Green

Panasonic

Doorphone 2

(KX-T30865)

Black

Green

Panasonic

Doorphone 4

(KX-T30865)

Installation 2-25

2.4.3


Connecting Door Openers

While pressing the button below a hole with a driver, insert the wire from the door opener into the hole.

Door opener 1

Door opener 2

Door opener 4

Door opener 3

Note

• We recommend using UL1015 wire or the equivalent for wiring.

• The wire should be between 0.4 mm and 1.2 mm {1/64 inch – 3/64 inch} in diameter including the coating.

D = 0.4 mm – 1.2 mm {1/64 inch – 3/64 inch}

To the door openers

2-26 Installation

2.4.3




[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch



Door Opener

Doorphone Call

Installation 2-27

2.4.4

Installing a 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card (KX-

TA62477) and 8 Extension Expansion Card (KX-TA62470)

3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA62477)

To add three outside (CO) lines (outside (CO) lines 4 through 6) and eight extensions (JACK 09 through 16), use an optional 3 CO

Line and 8 EXT Expansion card (KX-TA62477).

8 Extension Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA62470)

To add eight extensions (JACK 17 through 24), use an optional

8 Extension Expansion card (KX-TA62470).

This card can be installed directly to the system or to the

KX-TA62477.

Installing the KX-TA62477

1. Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord.

2. Loosen the screws and open the top and bottom front covers.

3. Remove the lower front panel with pliers as shown below.

Lower front panel

Cut the six areas marked with a circle.

2-28 Installation

2.4.4



4. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.

Installation 2-29

2.4.4



5. First, insert the plastic spacer into the hole near the Caller ID card connector on the KX-TA62477. Attach the extension connectors to the system, install the KX-TA62477 and secure the two extension bolts.

Extension Bolts


(KX-TA62477)

Caller ID Card Connector

Spacer

Extension Connectors

2-30 Installation

6. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords

(2-conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (CO 4 through 6) on the card. Refer to 2.3.3, Outside (CO) Line Connection.

7. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the modular jacks from the Central Office.

8. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (JACK 09 through 16) on the card. Refer to 2.3.4, Extension Connection.

9. Attach the optional Caller ID card (KX-TA62493) to the Caller

ID Card connector, if desired.

Refer to 2.4.2, Caller ID and OGM/FAX Detection Card

Installation.

2.4.4



Installing the KX-TA62470

1. Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord.


3. Remove the lower front panel. If you install the KX-TA62470 to a KX-TA62477, remove the top front panel in the same way as described in “ Installing the KX-TA62477”.

Top front panel

4. Attach the extension connectors to the system first, install the

KX-TA62470 and secure the two screws.

Screws


(KX-TA62470)


5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4conductor wiring) into the modular jacks (JACK 17 through 24) on the card. Refer to 2.3.4, Extension Connection.

Installation 2-31

2.4.4



When you install the KX-TA62470 to the KX-TA62477, install the KX-TA62477 first and then the KX-TA62470.

Screws


(KX-TA62470)

Extension Bolts



(KX-TA62477)


Spacer

2-32 Installation

2.4.5

Securing the cords

1. Wrap the strap around all of the cords.

2. Close the covers and secure the screws.

Note

• To remove the strap, loosen the rivet with a driver.

Rivet

Installation 2-33

2.5

Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure

Transfer

Power failure transfer connects a specific single line telephone to selected outside (CO) lines in the event of system power failure, as follows.

Outside (CO) Line 1 – Extension (T, R) Jack 01

Outside (CO) Line 4 – Extension (T, R) Jack 09

Connection of outside (CO) lines 1 and 4, and the respective extensions require no auxiliary connection.

Note

• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by a factoryprovided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the Camp-on,

Saved Number Redial, Last Number Redial, Call Park and Message

Waiting memories.

• The system automatically changes the current connection to the above connection when the power supply stops.

• Proprietary telephones cannot be used during a system power failure.

Therefore, we recommend connecting single line telephones in parallel with the proprietary telephones connected to JACK 01 and 09.




Power Failure Transfer

2-34 Installation

2.6

Closing the Front Cover

1. Replace the covers and tighten the screws.

2. Tie together all of the connected cords and attach them to the wall so that the cords cannot be pulled out of the system.

Installation 2-35

2.7

Starting the System for the First Time

1. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.

2. Turn the Power Switch on. (The power indicator will light.)

3. Perform the following operation with a proprietary telephone connected to JACK 01.

a) Set the MEMORY switch on the telephone to

“PROGRAM”.

b) Dial

*#.

c) Enter the system password, 1234.

d) Enter 999.

e) Press NEXT (SP-PHONE button).

f) Keep pressing SELECT (AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button) until “All Para” is displayed.

g) Press STORE (AUTO DIAL/STORE button).

h) Press END (HOLD button).

i) Set the MEMORY switch to “SET”.

The system will be initialized with the default values. If the system does not work properly, see “2.9, System Data Clear”.

CAUTION

• The system will continue to be powered even if the Power Switch is turned “OFF”.

• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.

AC Surge Protector

134 cm (52 1/16 inches)

2-36 Installation

2.8

System Restart

After starting the system, if the system does not operate properly, restart the system.

Before restarting the system, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.

System Restart causes the following.

1. Camp-on is cleared.

2. Calls on Hold are terminated.

3. Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.

4. Calls in progress are terminated.

5. Call Park is cleared.

6. Last Number Redial is cleared.

7. Saved Number Redial is cleared.

8. Message Waiting is cleared.

Other data is not cleared by System Restart.

1. Turn the Power switch off and then on.

Notice

If the system still does not operate properly, please see Section 2.9,

“System Data Clear”.

Installation 2-37

2.9

System Data Clear

When the system does not operate properly after restarting, you can clear the programming data stored in the system. The system will restart with the default settings. First, try system program [999]. If the system still does not operate properly, please follow the procedure below.


2. Slide the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.

3. Press the Reset Button.

4. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position before the power indicator stops flashing.

(The power indicator will flash for about 10 seconds.)

Reset Button

System Clear Switch

CAUTION

Before touching the System Clear Switch and Reset Button, put on a grounding strap.

Notice

After pressing the Reset Button, return the System Clear Switch to the

“NORMAL” position in step 4 before the power indicator stops flashing.

Otherwise, the system will not clear.



[999] System Data Clear

2-38 Installation

Section 3

Features

This section describes every basic, optional, and programmable feature in alphabetical order. It also provides information about the conditions, connection references, programming required, related features, and operation for every feature.

A

3 Features

A

bsent Message Capability

Description

Allows an extension user to set a message which will be displayed at the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension’s absence. Six messages can be programmed as desired, which are available for every extension user. Setting or canceling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone can view the message.

Conditions

• The six messages are shown below. “%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an extension.

(1) Will Return Soon

(2) Gone Home

(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)

(4) Back at %% : %% AM (or PM) (hour : minute)

(5) Out Until %% / %% (month / day)

(6) In a Meeting

• An extension user can only select one message at a time. The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.


No programming required.


None

Operation Reference

Telephone Features

— User Manual

Absent Message Capability

3-2 Features

3 Features

A

A

ccount Code Entry

Description

An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. For incoming outside calls, account codes are optional. For outgoing outside calls, there are four modes available to enter an account code: Verify-All mode, Verify-Toll mode, Forced mode, and

Option mode. One mode is selected for each extension.

In Verify-All mode, the user must always enter a pre-assigned account code when making any of the following calls unless it has previously been stored in memory.

• Call Forwarding – to Outside (CO) Line

• Last Number Redial

• Line Access

• One-Touch Dialing

• Personal Speed Dialing

• Pickup Dialing

• Saved Number Redial

• System Speed Dialing

In Verify-Toll mode, the user can enter a pre-assigned account code only when the user needs to override toll restriction. Calls with COS numbers 3 through 5 will be treated as calls with COS number 2.

Calls with COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be affected.

In Forced mode, the user must always enter an account code. The code can be any number.

In Option mode, the user can enter any account code if needed.

Conditions

• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing (System/Personal

Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing, Pickup Dialing, Call Forwarding – to

Outside (CO) Line).

• Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the SMDR call record is activated and the code cannot be entered.

• In any mode, emergency dial numbers stored in program

[309] “Emergency Dial Number Set” can be dialed out without an account code entry.



[310] Account Codes


— Day/Night /Lunch

[605] Account Code Entry Mode

[805] SMDR Account Code Selection



Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes



— User Manual

Account Code Entry

Features 3-3

A

3 Features

A

nswering, Direct Outside (CO) Line

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.

Condition

• This feature allows the user to specify which line will be answered when multiple incoming lines are ringing.





Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment



— User Manual

Answering, Direct Outside (CO) Line

3-4 Features

3 Features

A

A

utomatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)

Description

Allows the caller to be notified when the called party or selected outside (CO) line becomes free.

Automatic Callback – Extension

If the caller answers the callback ringing (Camp-On Recall), the called extension will automatically start ringing.

Automatic Callback – Outside (CO) Line

If the caller answers the callback ringing (Camp-On Recall), the line will be automatically selected to allow the user to make an outside call.

Conditions

• If the callback ringing (Camp-On Recall) is not answered in four rings

(within 10 seconds), the callback will be canceled.

• More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or outside (CO) line at the same time.




None



— User Manual

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)

Features 3-5

B

3 Features

B

ackground Music (BGM)

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to listen to background music from the speaker monitor on their telephone.

Conditions

• A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio, must be connected. One external music source can be connected to the system.

• The music source is used for BGM and/or Music on Hold.

• The music is interrupted when you go off-hook.

Connection Reference


2.3.6 External Music Source Connection





Music on Hold



— User Manual


3-6 Features

3 Features

B

B

usy Lamp Field

Description

The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the DSS (Direct

Station Selection) buttons, corresponding to selected extensions, show whether the extensions are idle or busy.

Conditions

• This function is available for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones and DSS buttons on DSS Consoles.

• A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy.


Station Programming

RRRRRRRRRR User Manual

Flexible Button Assignment – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button



Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Operation References

Not applicable.

B

usy Station Signaling (BSS)

Description

When attempting to call a busy extension, Busy Station Signaling allows you to signal the extension to answer your call. The called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and then is able to answer the call.

Condition

• This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call

Waiting. If Call Waiting is activated, the caller will hear a ringback tone.

If not, the caller will hear a reorder tone.





Call Waiting



— User Manual

Busy Station Signaling (BSS)

Features 3-7

B

3 Features

B

utton, Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Description

A DSS button allows a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to other extension users.

Conditions

• A flexible CO button and MESSAGE button on a proprietary telephone can be assigned as a DSS button using station programming.

• DSS buttons are provided on DSS Consoles with a default setting.

Changing the setting is possible from a paired telephone using station programming. Day, Night, Lunch and Station Lock buttons can be assigned to DSS buttons on DSS Consoles.

• Once a button is assigned as a DSS button, the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) status is available.

• The mode of a DSS button can be programmed to disconnect the outside

(CO) line and call the extension, or hold and transfer the call to the extension (One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button).



[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button

Station Programming RRRRRRRRRR User Manual


DSS Console Features

RRRRRRRRR User Manual

Station Programming



Busy Lamp Field

DSS Console (KX-T7040)

One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button

Remote Station Lock Control

Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service


Basic Operations

— User Manual

Making Calls


Call Transfer – to Extension

Operator/Manager Service Features

Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Setting



3-8 Features

3 Features

B

utton, Flexible

Description

B

The use of Flexible Buttons is determined by station programming.

The following four types of Flexible Buttons are provided on proprietary telephones (PT) and DSS Consoles:

• Flexible CO buttons (provided on a PT only)

• Flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons (provided on a

DSS Console only)

• MESSAGE button (provided on a PT except for the KX-T7055)

• Programmable Feature (PF) buttons

The table below shows all of the features which can be assigned to

Flexible Buttons.

DSS

(DSS)

PF

(PT/DSS)

MESSAGE

Button

Features to be assigned

Single-CO

Group-CO

Caller ID Indication

Caller ID Selection

Conference

FWD/DND

Log-In/Log-Out

Other-CO

Saved Number Redial

Day

Lunch

Night

Station Lock

Message Waiting

Live Call Screening (LCS)†

LCS Cancel†

Voice Mail Transfer†

Direct Station Selection (DSS)

One-Touch Dialing

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

CO

(PT)

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

“

✔” indicates that the feature is available.

† Available when the KX-TA624 is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable

Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports APT Integration; KX-TVS50).

Features 3-9

B

3 Features

Condition



Flexible Button Assignment

DSS Console Features (KX-T7040) RRRR User Manual


• Incoming and outgoing calls on a line are shown in the following priority.

Single-CO > Group-CO


Buttons on Proprietary Telephones



Not applicable.

3-10 Features

3 Features

B

B

utton, Group-CO (G-CO)

Description

To support efficient utilization of outside (CO) lines, a group of outside (CO) lines (outside (CO) line group) can be assigned to a

CO button. The function is referred to as Group-CO (G-CO). Any incoming call from any outside (CO) line in the outside (CO) line group arrives at the G-CO button. To make an outside call, the user can access an idle outside (CO) line in the group by simply pressing the assigned G-CO button.

Conditions



[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment

[404] Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment

[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection


Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button


• A G-CO button is not originally provided on a proprietary telephone

(PT). It can be programmed on a CO button by station programming.

• The extension for receiving and/or originating calls on outside (CO) lines must be programmed.

• The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-

CO button on the same PT.

• The same line can be assigned to a Single-CO (S-CO) button and a

G-CO button.

• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be selected on an extension-outside (CO) line basis.

• Users can choose a desired ringing pattern for each outside (CO) line by system programming.



LED Indication, Outside (CO) Line

Line Access, Outside (CO) Line Group

Outside (CO) Line Group

Ringing, Delayed

Ringing Pattern Selection for

Intercom Calls and Outside

(CO) Lines



— User Manual

Making Calls

Receiving Calls



Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic, Outside (CO) Line Group

Features 3-11

B

3 Features

B

utton, Other-CO (O-CO)

Description

Outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to a S-CO or G-CO button, can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone (PT). The assigned button serves as the Other-CO

(O-CO) button. An incoming call on an outside (CO) line arrives at the O-CO. To make an outside call, the PT user simply presses the assigned O-CO button.

Conditions

• An O-CO button is not originally provided on a PT. A flexible CO button can be assigned as an O-CO button by station programming.

• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be selected on an extension – outside (CO) line basis.











Flexible Button Assignment – Other-CO (O-CO) Button



Answering, Direct Outside (CO) Line Line Access, Direct


Line Access, Automatic

Ringing, Delayed



(CO) Lines



— User Manual

Making Calls

Receiving Calls


Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic

3-12 Features

3 Features

B

B

utton, Single-CO (S-CO)

Description

A Single-CO (S-CO) button is an outside (CO) line access button.

This allows a proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by pressing a S-CO button. An incoming call can be directed to a

S-CO button.

Conditions

• The default setting for CO buttons is changeable. (Flexible CO Button)

• A S-CO button provides outside (CO) line status.

• One outside (CO) line can be assigned to both a S-CO and a Group-CO

(G-CO) button.

• Incoming calls are indicated on a proprietary telephone, when an extension is assigned as the incoming call destination and a S-CO,

G-CO and/or O-CO button is assigned.

• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be selected on an extension–outside (CO) line basis.











Flexible Button Assignment – Single-CO (S-CO) Button



Answering, Direct Outside (CO) Line Line Access, Individual


Line Access, Direct

Ringing, Delayed



(CO) Lines



— User Manual

Making Calls

Receiving Calls


Outward Dialing – Line Access, Individual

Features 3-13

B

3 Features

B

uttons on Proprietary Telephones

Description

Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature/line access buttons listed below.

KX-T Proprietary Telephones

Buttons

AUTO ANSWER/MUTE

❖

AUTO DIAL/STORE

❖

CO

❖

*

CONF

❖

FLASH

FWD/DND

❖

HOLD

INTERCOM

❖

MESSAGE

❖

*

MONITOR

❖

PAUSE

PF (Programmable Feature)

REDIAL

SAVE

SP-PHONE

❖

TRANSFER

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

7020

✔

✔

7030

✔

✔

✔(12)

✔

✔(12)

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

7050

✔

✔(12)

✔!

✔

✔

✔(4)

✔

✔

✔(4)

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔(4)

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔ ✔

7055

✔!

✔(3)

✔!

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

7130

✔

✔

✔(12)

✔

✔!

✔

✔(3)

✔

✔

✔

✔(12)

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔: The button is provided on the designated telephone.

❖: The button has a LED (Light Emitting Diode).

* : Buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons.

!: The button does not have a LED.

(x): Shows the number of buttons only if more than one button is provided.

3-14 Features

3 Features

B

The functions of the listed buttons are described below.

AUTO ANSWER/MUTE: Used for answering an extension automatically, or turns the microphone off during a conversation.

AUTO DIAL/STORE: Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes.

CO (Central Office line): Can make or receive an outside call or can be re-assigned to a different CO or various feature buttons.

CONF (Conference): Used to establish a three-party conference.

FLASH: Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up (Flash). Sends a flash signal to the

Central Office or host PBX to access their features (External

Feature Access).

FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb): Used to program

Call Forwarding, and set Do Not Disturb.

HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.

INTERCOM: Used to make or receive intercom calls.

MESSAGE: Used to send a message, display the current message, call back the message sender, or can be assigned as another feature button.

MONITOR: Used for a hands-free operation.

PAUSE: Inserts a pause in a speed dial number.

PF (Programmable Feature): This flexible button can be programmed as a One-Touch Dialing button, if desired.

REDIAL: Used for Last Number or Automatic Redialing.

SAVE: Used to store a dialed telephone number for Saved Number

Redial.

SP-PHONE (Speakerphone): Used for a hands-free speakerphone operation. Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between the handset and hands-free operation.

TRANSFER: Transfers a call to another extension or external destination.

Conditions

• Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators (LED’s) to show the line or feature status.

• CO buttons can be classified according to the following three types:

Single-CO (S-CO) button / Group-CO (G- CO) button /

Other-CO (O- CO) button





None


Refer to the appropriate operating instructions.

— User Manual

Features 3-15

C

3 Features

C

aller ID

Description

Provides a display proprietary telephone user with the caller’s information, such as their name and telephone number, on the outside (CO) line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls.

Conditions

• The outside (CO) lines where the Caller ID service is offered by a

Central Office must be assigned.

• A display PT (KX-T7030 or KX-T7130) user can record the caller information received by Caller ID (Call Log, Incoming feature).

• If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name, the user can select the initial display, number or name, by system programming.

• An optional Caller ID Card must be installed to the system.



2.4.2 Caller ID and OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation



[900] Caller ID Assignment


[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls

[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls

[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection

[906] Caller ID SMDR Format



Call Log, Incoming



— User Manual

Call Information/Log, Incoming

Call Log, Incoming

3-16 Features

3 Features

C

C

ALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY

Description

Call Forwarding features enable an extension user to have their calls forwarded to a specified destination. The user may determine the conditions of how their calls will be forwarded. The following

Call Forwarding features are available:

Call Forwarding – All Calls

Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer

Call Forwarding – Follow Me

Call Forwarding – to an Outside (CO) Line

C

all Forwarding – All Calls

Description

This feature is used when a user wants all their calls to be automatically re-directed to another extension.

Conditions

• The types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:

Outside calls – DIL; DISA; Normal

Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer

• The extensions which have already been assigned as a forwarded destination cannot set the Call Forwarding feature.

• Although calls can be forwarded, Message Waiting cannot. The

MESSAGE button indicator will light on the original called extension.

• If the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature has already been set, setting the

Call Forwarding feature will cancel DND.




Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button


None



— User Manual

Call Forwarding — All Calls

Features 3-17

C

3 Features

C

all Forwarding – Busy/No Answer

Description

A user’s calls are forwarded to another extension if their extension is busy or they do not answer the call within a pre-determined time.

Conditions


Outside calls – DIL; DISA; Normal


• The extensions which have been already assigned as the forwarded destination cannot set the Call Forwarding feature.

• Although calls can be forwarded, Message Waiting cannot. The

MESSAGE button indicator will light on the original called extension.





[202] Call Forwarding Start Time




None



— User Manual

Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer

3-18 Features

3 Features

C

C

all Forwarding – Follow Me

Description

If a user forgets to set Call Forwarding – All Calls before they leave their desk, this allows them to set the same feature from the destination extension.

Condition

• Same as the conditions for Call Forwarding – All Calls.






Call Forwarding – All Calls



— User Manual

Call Forwarding — Follow Me

Features 3-19

C

3 Features

C

all Forwarding – to an Outside (CO) Line

Description

Calls directed to an extension will be sent to an external destination.

The outside telephone number must be pre-programmed.

Conditions


Outside calls – DIL; DISA


• The forwarding extension’s Toll Restriction and Account Code Entry requirements still apply.



• System programming determines which extensions are able to perform this feature.

• If a call between two outside parties is established by this feature, the duration of the call is determined by the system timer. An alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time-out. The call is disconnected at the time-out.



[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit

[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line





Limited Call Duration



— User Manual

Call Forwarding — to an Outside (CO) Line

3-20 Features

3 Features

C

C

all Hold – Intercom

Description

This is used to place an intercom call on hold. The held call can be retrieved by the user who held it or by any other extension.

Conditions



[104] Hold Mode Selection

[200] Hold Recall Time


• Only one intercom call can be placed on hold (up to ten calls in the system – Call Park). With a proprietary telephone, outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time. With a single line telephone, either one outside or intercom call can be held.

• If a call on hold is not retrieved within a pre-assigned period of time,

Hold Alarm/Hold Recall occurs.


Call Park

Hold Alarm/Hold Recall



— User Manual

Call Hold

Features 3-21

C

3 Features

C

all Hold – Outside (CO) Line

Description

Allows an extension user to put an outside call on hold. The held call can be retrieved by the user who held it or by any other extension.

Conditions

• With a single line telephone, the user can hold only one call, either an extension or outside call.

• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).

• If a call on hold is not retrieved within a specific period of time, Hold

Alarm/Hold Recall occurs.

• If an external party is placed on hold and not retrieved within 30 minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.








Music on Hold



— User Manual

Call Hold

3-22 Features

3 Features

C

C

all Hold, Exclusive – Intercom

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to prevent other extension users from retrieving a held intercom call. Only the user who held the call can retrieve it.

Conditions

• Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call

Hold at a time.



• This feature is not available for single line telephones.









— User Manual

Call Hold, Exclusive

C

all Hold, Exclusive – Outside (CO) Line

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to prevent other extension users from retrieving a held outside call. Only the user who held the call can retrieve it.

Conditions



• If an external party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.

• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).







Music on Hold



— User Manual

Call Hold, Exclusive

Features 3-23

C

3 Features

C

all Hold Retrieve – Intercom

Description

Allows an extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension.

Condition

A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by entering the feature number.





Call Hold – Intercom



— User Manual

Call Hold Retrieve

C

all Hold Retrieve – Outside (CO) Line

Description

Allows an extension user to retrieve a specific outside call that has been placed on hold by another extension.

Condition

A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by entering the feature number.





Call Hold – Outside (CO) Line



— User Manual

Call Hold Retrieve

3-24 Features

3 Features

C

C

alling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Description

The Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal is an on-hook indication

(disconnect signal) sent from the outside (CO) line when the telephone is hung up at the other end. To maintain efficient utilization of outside (CO) lines, the system monitors their state and when a CPC Signal is detected from a line, the system disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone.

Conditions

• CPC Signal Detection is enabled or disabled for incoming and outgoing outside calls by system programming.

• Generally, CPC for Signal Detection works for incoming outside calls, and does not work for outgoing outside calls (except after they are placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call Hold). In this case, if an extension user remains off-hook after an outgoing outside call is completed, the system will not release all the switches used to establish the connection.

The connected outside (CO) line will continue to be in use. To prevent this, CPC Signal Detection can be programmed to work for outgoing outside calls.

• If a CPC Signal is detected during a Conference call, the line will be disconnected and the remaining two parties can resume their call.

• If a CPC Signal is detected during a call between a DISA caller and an extension or external party, the line will be disconnected.



[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal



None


Not applicable.

Features 3-25

C

3 Features

C

all Log, Incoming

Description

If a display proprietary telephone (KX-T7030 or KX-T7130) user cannot answer a call, the telephone will automatically record the caller’s information. Moreover, the user can call back the caller by checking the call log. This is available if a telephone receives incoming outside calls using a Caller ID service. A maximum of 20 calls per telephone can be logged.

The displayed information is as follows:

• The received outside (CO) line number and name

• The date and time the call was received.

Conditions

• The user’s area code must be assigned before they use the Caller ID feature.

• The call is registered when the PT finishes ringing. If a call is directed to multiple PTs, the call will be registered at the PT that is connected to the lowest jack number.

• Information is also recorded even if a transferred call (unscreened) is not answered.

• When the call log is full (i.e. 20 calls are stored), the user can overwrite the data, replacing the oldest call with the newest one at their extension

(Call Log, Incoming).

• A telephone user can lock their display so that the incoming call information is not shown on the display. The operator or manager can cancel the lock.

• The system automatically modifies the incoming caller’s number, depending on programming, for local or long distance calls. The modified number will be recorded so it can be called back. Users can also modify the number manually.

<Example>

[901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment” : 201

[902] “Caller ID Modification for Local Calls” : delete – 3 digits, add – blank

[903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls” : delete – 0 digit, add – 1

Caller’s number provided by CO

Local call: 2011234567

Long distance call: 7149876543

Recorded caller’s number

1234567 (modified by [902])

17149876543 (modified by [903])




3-26 Features

3 Features






[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls




Caller ID



— User Manual

Call Log, Incoming

Call Log Lock, Incoming



C

C

all Park

Description

Allows an extension user to place a held call into a system parking area. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user.

Conditions

• The system contains ten parking areas, each of which has its own call park number. Up to ten calls can be parked at the same time in the system.

• If a parked call is not retrieved within a pre-assigned period of time,


• If a parked call is not retrieved in 30 minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.









— User Manual

Call Park

Features 3-27

C

3 Features

C

all Pickup, Directed

Description

Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension.

Conditions

• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom, or doorphone call.

• A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up. The tone can be disabled.

• Hold recalls and camp on recalls cannot be picked up.



[117] Call Pickup Tone


None



— User Manual

Call Pickup, Directed

C

all Pickup, Group

Description

Allows an extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group.

Conditions

• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom, or doorphone call.

• A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up. The tone can be disabled.




[600] Extension Group Assignment


None



— User Manual

Call Pickup, Group

3-28 Features

3 Features

C

C

all Pickup Deny

Description

Allows a user to prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at their extension by using the call pickup feature.

Condition

A Distinctive Dial Tone is sent to the extension user by this feature when the user goes off-hook.






Call Pickup, Group



— User Manual

Call Pickup Deny

C

all Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)

Description

Allows an extension user to answer an incoming call received by

TAM.

Conditions

None



[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension


None



— User Manual

Call Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)

Features 3-29

C

3 Features

C

all Splitting

Description

Allows an extension user to alternate between two other parties.

Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party.

Condition

• Call Splitting is not possible during a Doorphone Call or Paging.




None



— User Manual

Call Splitting

3-30 Features

3 Features

C

C

ALL TRANSFER FEATURES – SUMMARY

Description

Call Transfer features allow a user to transfer a call to another party.

This operation can be screened or unscreened. Screened call transfer is used when the user wants to announce the call to the other party before completing the transfer. Unscreened call transfer immediately releases the caller to the called party. An intercom or an outside call can be transferred to an extension or to an external party by the following.

Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension

Call Transfer, Screened – to an Outside (CO) Line

Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension

C

all Transfer, Screened – to Extension

Description

Allows an extension user to voice-announce to the extension and transfer the call.

Condition

• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the caller while being transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold to the caller can be programmed by program [111].





[201] Transfer Recall Time






— User Manual

Call Transfer — to Extension

Features 3-31

C

3 Features

C

all Transfer, Screened – to an Outside (CO) Line

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to voice-announce to an external party and transfer the call.

Conditions

• System programming determines which extensions are able to perform this feature.

• A single line telephone user cannot transfer a received call to an external party.

• If a call between two external parties is established using this feature, the duration of the call is restricted by a system timer. Hold Alarm/Hold

Recall is generated to the extension who transferred the call 50 seconds before the time-out. Also, an alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time-out. The call is disconnected at the time-out unless the extension rejoins the conversation.

• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the caller while being transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold to the caller can be programmed by program [111].





[606] Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line






— User Manual

Call Transfer — to an Outside (CO) Line

3-32 Features

3 Features

C

C

all Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension

Description

Allows a user to transfer an intercom or outside call directly to an extension party. After dialing the destination extension, the user waits for the ringback tone and replaces the handset.

Conditions

• If the destination party does not answer within the pre-determined time, the call will return to the user (Transfer Recall).

• This feature is possible when the destination is sending a ringback or busy tone. If the destination is busy, Camp-On Transfer occurs.

• The ringing signal pattern depends on the party being transferred: outside or extension call ringing.

• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the caller while being transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold to the caller is programmable by program [111].











— User Manual


Features 3-33

C

C

all Waiting

Description

3 Features

Conditions

During a conversation, a call waiting tone notifies the user that another incoming call is waiting. They can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold. The call waiting tone can be activated or deactivated by dialing the appropriate feature number.

• A call waiting tone is generated when an outside call (except a doorphone call) is received, or when an extension caller executes Busy

Station Signaling, if Call Waiting is enabled.

• Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on by an extension user.

• For proprietary telephone users, two types of call waiting tones are provided.

A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by station programming.

• Tone 2 depends on the assignment in program [423] “Outside (CO) Line

Ringing Pattern Selection” for outside (CO) lines and program [115]

“Extension Ringing Pattern Selection” for intercom calls.

15 s

Tone 1

5 s

Tone 2

Single:

Double:

Triple:



[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection



Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment



Busy Station Signaling (BSS)

Data Line Security



— User Manual

Call Waiting

3-34 Features

3 Features

C

C

all Waiting from a Central Office

Description

During a conversation, a call waiting tone offered by the Central

Office notifies the user that another incoming call is waiting. They can answer the second call by placing the current call on hold.

Conditions

None



[110] Flash Key Mode

[418] Flash Time



Call Waiting



— User Manual

Call Waiting from a Central Office

Features 3-35

C

3 Features

C

onference

Description

The system supports three-party conference calls, including external or internal parties. During a two-party conversation, the extension user can add a third party to their conversation, thereby establishing a conference.

Conditions

• Possible conference combinations are:1-intercom and 2-outside calls;

2-intercom and 1-outside calls; and 3-intercom calls.

• A three-party call can also be established by Executive Busy Override.

• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. The tone can be disabled.





Flexible Button Assignment – Conference (CONF) Button



Conference, Unattended



— User Manual

Conference

3-36 Features

3 Features

C

C

onference, Unattended

Description

When a proprietary telephone user is in a conference with two external parties, the user can leave the conference to allow the other two parties to continue the conversation. This is called an

Unattended Conference. The user may return to the conference, if desired.

Conditions

• An Unattended Conference can be established when the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside (CO) line.

• The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer.

Hold Alarm/Hold Recall is enabled at the extension who left the conference 50 seconds before the time-out. An alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time-out. The call is disconnected at the time-out unless the extension rejoins the conversation.







Conference


Limited Call Duration



— User Manual


Features 3-37

C

3 Features

C

onfirmation Tones

Description

When various features are completed, the system confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user through the speaker of the telephone.

Confirmation tone 1:

(a) Indicates that the new setting is different from the previous setting.

(b) Sets or cancels Electronic Station Lockout.

1 s


(a) Indicates that the new setting is the same as the previous setting.

(b) Also, sent when various features are successfully performed or accessed. (e.g. Call Hold, Automatic Callback Busy)

1 s


Sent when a conversation is established just after dialing.

For example, when accessing the following features by their feature numbers:

• Conference

• Call Pickup

• Paging – External

• Paging Answer

This tone can be disabled by system programming so that the user can start talking immediately.

1 s

3-38 Features

3 Features

C


Sent when changing a three-party call (created by Executive Busy

Override or Conference) to a two-party call. This tone can be disabled by system programming.

1 s

Condition

• Confirmation Tones 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm assigned features.







None


Not applicable.

Features 3-39

D

3 Features

D

ata Line Security

Description

Data Line Security is a feature that can be set at individual extensions. Once set, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold

Alarm/Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data communications. During communication,

Data Line Security maintains secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions.

Conditions

None





Call Waiting

Executive Busy Override




— User Manual

Data Line Security

3-40 Features

3 Features

D

D

ial Tones, Distinctive

Description

Three types of dial tone patterns are available to give information about features activated on the telephone.

Dial tone 1: This is a normal dial tone. None of the features listed below are activated.

1 s

Dial tone 2: Sent when any one of the features below are set.

Absent Message Capability

Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones only)

Call Forwarding

Call Pickup Deny

Data Line Security

Do Not Disturb (DND)

Electronic Station Lockout

Message Waiting (for proprietary telephones only)

Pickup Dialing (for single line telephones only)


Timed Reminder

1 s

Dial tone 3: Sent when performing Account Code Entry and sent when answering a Timed Reminder call.

Also sent when going off-hook with a single line telephone which has messages left in a Voice Processing System.

1 s

Conditions

None




None


Not applicable.

Features 3-41

D

3 Features

D

ial Type Selection

Description

Allows an extension user to select the desired dialing mode for each outside (CO) line regardless of the originating extension (rotary or tone). There are three dialing modes available.

DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) Mode

The dialing signal from an extension, either tone or rotary, is converted to tone dialing. DTMF signals are transmitted to the outside (CO) line.

Pulse Dial (Rotary) Mode

The dialing signal from an extension, either tone or rotary, is converted to rotary dialing. Rotary pulses are transmitted to the outside (CO) line.

Call Blocking Mode

Set this mode for outside (CO) lines that can receive both tone and rotary dialing, but are under contract with the Central

Office for rotary dialing only. When dialing to a line using a touch-tone telephone, only rotary dialing is sent to the Central

Office.

Conditions



[401] Dial Mode



• Extension users can temporarily convert the pre-assigned rotary dialing mode to DTMF mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion). DTMF mode cannot be changed to rotary.

• Either DTMF or rotary dialing can be assigned for the DISA (Direct

Inward System Access) outgoing line. With DISA, pulse to tone conversion is not possible.

• If an outside (CO) line can receive both DTMF and pulse signals and is contracted for DTMF with a Central Office, the DTMF mode should be selected for the line. If it is contracted for rotary mode, the Call

Blocking mode should be selected for the line.

• If a line is assigned to the Pulse Dial mode, select an appropriate pulse speed, if necessary.

• After a held call is retrieved, the dial mode returns to the one originally programmed for the outside (CO) line.


End-to-End DTMF Signaling

(Tone Through)

Pulse to Tone Conversion


Not applicable.

3-42 Features

3 Features

D

D

irect In Lines (DIL)

Description

Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one extension.

DIL places an incoming outside call to only one extension. This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls, but can only be used by one extension to receive calls.

DIL can have different destinations for the day, night and lunch modes (Time Service).

Condition

• If the Station Hunting feature is assigned to the destination extension, the call will be hunted.



[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch



Station Hunting


Not applicable.

Features 3-43

D

3 Features

D

irect Inward System Access (DISA)

Description

Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system. The caller can have direct access to features such as:

• Placing an incoming call to an extension, operator or ring group. The caller also has the option of dialing the route for an extension using a one digit number (DISA built-in auto attendant number) via DISA calls.

• Calling an external party.

One of the following must be selected to have direct access to these features: (1) None Security, (2) Trunk (Outside (CO) Line)

Security, or (3) All Security. In None Security mode, any caller can make outside or intercom calls. In Trunk (Outside (CO) Line)

Security mode, a pre-assigned DISA security code must be entered to make outside calls. In All Security mode, a pre-assigned DISA security code must be entered to make both outside and intercom calls. This prevents callers from making unauthorized calls.

However, when making an outside call by Call Forwarding – to

Outside (CO) Line, the call is allowed (exception).

An Outgoing Message can be programmed for the DISA feature.

When a caller reaches a DISA line, a message will greet the caller.

Two different DISA messages can be recorded by the operator or manager. For example, one message can be used in the day mode and the other in night mode, or they can be used for different outside (CO) lines. If an optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed, the caller will hear a beep instead of the outgoing message (the internal DISA).

Conditions

• The following items are required for the DISA feature.

(1) “DISA1” or “DISA2” must be assigned to outside (CO) line(s) as the outside (CO) line mode.

(2) An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card must be installed for outgoing messages.

(3) The DISA message(s) should be recorded by the operator or manager.

(2) and (3) are required for outgoing messages and fax detection.

• After the DISA Delayed Answer Time expires and a ringback tone is returned to the caller, a DISA call will be answered. The caller can dial during the message or after the tone.

• This system can store up to ten programmable DISA built-in auto attendant numbers. Each number is one digit.

3-44 Features

3 Features

D

• The DISA built-in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other numbers (extension number, etc.). To avoid confusion, the system waits for the second digit for a preprogrammed amount of time

(default: 2 seconds). If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number.

• Only one OGM/FAX Detection card can be installed.

• The DISA line can be used to originate outside calls if a security code (if required) has been dialed.

• This system can store up to four programmable DISA security codes.

Each code should be different.

• The duration of outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line calls can be limited.

When the specified time expires, both lines are disconnected. A warning tone is sent to both parties 15 seconds before the time-limit.

• To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, CPC

Signal Detection can be assigned.

• If a wrong DISA security code is entered, three beeps will be heard. The call will be disconnected after three failed attempts.






To enable the DISA feature


[420] Calling Party Control (CPC Signal)


[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection

[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant

[502] OGM Mode Selection


[506] DISA Busy Mode

[510] DISA No Dial Mode

[511] DISA Security Type

[512] DISA Security Codes

[513] Cyclic Tone Detection

[514] FAX Tone Detection

[516] DISA Incoming Assignment

[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code

To set DISA timer values

[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time limit

[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time

[505] DISA Waiting Time After OGM

[517] DISA AA Wait Time

Features 3-45

D

3 Features

To enable the Intercept Routing feature


[507] DISA Intercept Mode

[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept

[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept

[515] Intercept Time For Internal DISA



Intercept Routing




— User Manual


3-46 Features

3 Features

Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls

D

An outside line call is made.

*1

The caller reaches the DISA line.

Without optional

OGM/FAX Detection Card

(Internal DISA)

With optional

OGM/FAX Detection Card

@@@@@@@@e?

@@@@@@@@e?

@@h?

@@h?

@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?

@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?

@@@@@@@@

@@@@@@@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

One short beep

@@g

@@g

@@g

@@@@@@@@

@@@@@@@@

?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@

?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@

?@@

?@@

?@@

?@@@@@@@@

?@@@@@@@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

*2

*3

C

@@@@@@@@e?

@@@@@@@@e?

@@h?

@@h?

@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?

@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?

@@@@@@@@

@@@@@@@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

OGM

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@

@@g

@@g

@@g

@@@@@@@@

@@@@@@@@

?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@

?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@

?@@

?@@

?@@

?@@@@@@@@

?@@@@@@@@

*13

*14

Cyclic tone or CPC signal

CNG tone

*18

A number is dialed.

*4

Is Intercept Routing employed?

Yes

*8

What is the DISA

Busy Mode?

*10

Nothing is dialed.

*15

The call is sent to the fax extension.

Is a security code required?

No

*5

Yes

The security code is entered.

All

What is the security type?

Trunk or None

Is Intercept Routing employed?

*16

Yes

Disconnect.

Busy tone

No

One short beep

The code is correct.

*6

Make an outside call.

The call is sent to another extension.

The code is incorrect.

*17

Disconnect.

A

Reorder tone

The call reaches the destination.

*7

Disconnect.

Answered.

The call is not answered.

The destination extension(s) is(are) busy.

*9

Answered.


Answered.

The call is not answered for

40 seconds.

B

Disconnect.

Disconnect.

No

The call is sent to another extension.

Disconnect

Busy tone

Call Waiting DISA2

Goes to A

Disconnect.

*11

The other

OGM is heard.

Answered.

Goes to

C


*12

Goes to B

Features 3-47

D

3 Features

*1: The DISA Delayed Timer starts. This is the time between a call reaching the system and being received. The time is assigned in program [504] “DISA Delayed Answer Time”.

*2: When a call is received and the system answers, the system sends a short beep to the caller.

*3: The Intercept Timer for Internal DISA starts. This is the time the system waits for the number sent by the caller. If nothing is entered by the caller during this time, the system will regard it as

“Nothing is dialed.” The time is assigned in program [515] “Intercept Time for Internal DISA”.

*4: The system can accept the following numbers:

• 100 through 199 as an extension number.

• 81 through 86 as an outside (CO) line group line access number.

• 9 as an automatic line access number when “Without AA” is assigned in program [500] “DISA

Incoming Dialing Mode Selection”. Even if “With AA” is assigned, 9 is regarded as the automatic line access number if nothing is assigned to “9” in program [501] “DISA Built-in

Auto Attendant”.

• 0 as the operator call number when the operator is assigned in program [008] “Operator

Assignment” and “Without AA” is assigned in program [500] “DISA Incoming Dialing Mode

Selection”. Even if “With AA” is assigned, 0 is regarded as the operator call number if nothing is assigned to “0” in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”.

• 0 through 9 as a built-in auto attendant number when “With AA” is assigned in program [500]

“DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection”. The DISA AA Wait timer starts after receiving the first 1-digit number. If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is an AA number. The time is assigned in program [517] “DISA AA Wait Time”.

*5: A security code is necessary when program [511] “DISA Security Type” is assigned as follows.

• All Security – the system waits for a security code dialed after “ ”. When the security code matches a code programmed in program [512] “DISA Security Codes”, the system accepts the numbers after the code.

• Trunk Security – the caller can access an outside (CO) line if the security code matches a code programmed in program [512] “DISA Security Codes”. The caller can access other destinations without the security code.

If the entered number is the same as one of the security codes, a short beep is heard. The beep can be disabled in program [518] “DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code”. If the number is wrong, three beeps will be heard. The call will be disconnected after three failed attempts.

*6: The caller must enter the desired phone number after hearing a dial tone from the Central Office.

*7: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in program [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept”.

*8: The system treats the call according to program [507] “DISA Intercept Mode” as follows.

• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.

• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in programs [408]–[410] “Flexible

Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”.

If the call is still not answered within the time programmed in program [509] “DISA Ringing

Time after Intercept”, it will be disconnected.

*9: If the destination extension belongs to a hunting group and all extensions in the group are busy, the system checks the DISA Busy Mode. If the destination is the Ring group, the DISA Busy

Mode will not work for the call. The system regards the call as unanswered.

3-48 Features

3 Features

D

*10: The DISA Busy Mode is selected in program [506] “DISA Busy Mode”. There are three modes as follows:

• Disconnect – the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.

• Call Waiting – the destination extension hears the call waiting tone if they have enabled Call

Waiting.

• DISA2 – if “MODE2” is assigned in program [502] “OGM Mode Selection” and a message is recorded in OGM2, the caller hears the message and the system waits for the new destination.

*11: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in program [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept”.

*12: In this case, the system disregards the security type and does not accept the line access code. If nothing is recorded in OGM2, the caller will hear a busy tone and the call is disconnected.

*13: The OGM is sent to the caller according to programs [414]–[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode –

Day/Night/Lunch” and [502] “OGM Mode Selection”. If an OGM is not recorded, the DISA

Wait Timer After OGM programmed in program [505] “DISA Waiting Time after OGM” will start immediately.

When the system detects a CNG tone while the OGM is being sent, the call is sent to the FAX extension. When the system detects a cyclic tone or a CPC signal while the OGM is being sent, the call is disconnected.

*14: The DISA Wait Timer After OGM starts. The system waits for a number from the caller during the time programmed in program [505] “DISA Waiting Time after OGM”. When the system detects a CNG tone during the programmed time, the call is sent to the FAX extension. When the system detects a cyclic tone or a CPC signal during the programmed time, the call is disconnected.

*15: After the DISA Wait Timer After OGM or the Intercept Timer for Internal DISA expires, the system regards that nothing was dialed .

*16: The system treats the call according to program [510] “DISA No Dial Mode” as follows.

• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.

• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in programs [408]–[410] “Flexible

Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”. If all of the extensions are assigned to

“Disable”, the call will be disconnected.

*17: The DISA Ring Timer After Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in program [509] “DISA Ringing Time after Intercept”. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.

*18: The FAX extension assigned in program [503] “FAX Connection” receives the call. When the extension is busy, the system sends a busy tone to the Fax. If the call is not answered after

40 seconds, the call will be disconnected.

Program [514] “Fax Tone Detection” sets how many times the CNG tone must be detected before the system recognizes the incoming signal as facsimile data.

Features 3-49

D

3 Features

D

isplay, Call Information

Description

A display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call information.

Extension number and name

These are shown when calling or when called by an extension user, during an established intercom call, and while on-hook.

Display example: 102: Smith

Dialed telephone number

This is shown when dialing the telephone number.

Display example: 91234567890

Number or name of the caller

These are shown if the Caller ID feature is available.

Display examples: 1234567890

Panasonic

Call duration

This is shown during an established outside call. The display remains for five seconds after the call is finished.

Display example: CO 2 0:02'28

Conditions

• Extension numbers and names are programmable. If an extension name is not stored, only the extension number will be displayed.

• The display does not show the intercom call duration.

• The outgoing outside call duration starts when the programmable timer expires.



[009] Extension Number Assignment

[204] Call Duration Count Start Time

[604] Extension Name Setting



Caller ID


Not applicable.

3-50 Features

3 Features

D

D

isplay, in Idle

Description

Offers a display proprietary telephone user to display the current time and date, or the extension number and name. One of the following displays is displayed while on-hook. The user can change the display by pressing the key.

Conditions

• Display example (12 H): Month, Day, Time (AM/PM)

Jan 1 11:20PM

Display example (24 H): Day, Month, Time

Jan 1 23:20

Display example: Month, Day, Year, Day of the week

Jan 1,1998 Thu

Display example: Extension number and name

123:Tony Viola

• The current date and time are set by system programming or the operator/manager service features.

• The user can select how to show the present time, 12 hours or 24 hours by system programming.



[000] Date and Time Setting

[010] LCD Time Display Selection


None


Operator / Manager Service Features

— User Manual

Date and Time Setting

Appendix

Display Examples

Features 3-51

D

3 Features

D

isplay, Self-Extension Number

Description

Allows a display proprietary telephone user to display their own jack number and extension number in the station programming mode.

Condition

• Display example

If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 102:

Jack02<=>EXT102



Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7030 and KX-T7130 only)


None


Not applicable.

D

isplay Contrast Adjustment

Description

Allows a display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast.

Condition

• A lever on the telephone (CONTRAST selector) is used to select one of three available levels.


Configuration

RRRRRRRRRRRRR User Manual

Initial Settings — Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7030 and

KX-T7130 only)


None


Not applicable.

3-52 Features

3 Features

D

D

o Not Disturb (DND)

Description

Allows an extension user to appear busy to incoming outside or intercom calls. This can be set or canceled by the extension user.

Conditions

• If a proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND button, it can be assigned to a flexible CO button.

• DND does not work for the following calls: hold recalls or the Timed

Reminder alarm.

• A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the corresponding flashing button.

• An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in program [609] “Do Not Disturb

Override”.

• If the Call Forwarding feature has already been set, setting the DND feature will cancel Call Forwarding.









— User Manual


D

o Not Disturb (DND) Override

Description

Allows a pre-assigned extension user to call another user who has set the Do Not Disturb feature. Dialing “2” enables the caller to override DND programmed on the called extension’s telephone and forces the telephone to ring.

Condition

• System programming determines which extension users can perform

DND Override.



[609] Do Not Disturb Override






— User Manual


Features 3-53

D

3 Features

D

oor Opener

Description

Allows extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their telephone. The door can be unlocked by extension users who have been programmed to enable this feature.

Conditions

• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener card must be installed.

• A user-supplied door opener must be installed to the door to be opened.

Four door openers can be installed.

• The door opener will open the door even if a doorphone is not installed.

• The user can modify the door opener timer through system programming.



2.4.3 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection




[709] Door Opener time



Doorphone Call



— User Manual

Door Opener

3-54 Features

3 Features

D

D

oorphone Call

Description

If a visitor presses the doorphone button, pre-assigned extensions will be called. The extension who answers the call can talk to the visitor. Any extension user can call a doorphone. The doorphones are also used for the Room Monitor feature.

Conditions

• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener card must be installed.

• Four doorphones can be installed.

• The extensions which can receive calls from each doorphone during the day, night and lunch modes must be programmed.

• If an extension user does not answer an incoming doorphone call within a programmed period of time, the ringing will stop and be canceled.

• A programmed extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in (Door Opener). This requires a user-supplied door opener.

• An access tone can be programmed to be sent to the monitored doorphone before monitoring starts.

• The ringing tone from the doorphone call is programmable.

• Doorphone 1 and Doorphone 2 cannot receive calls simultaneously.

When one is in use, an extension user cannot have a conversation with the other. This is the same for Doorphone 3 and Doorphone 4.



2.4.3 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection




[706] Door Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection

[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection




Door Opener

Room Monitor



— User Manual

Doorphone Call

Room Monitor

Features 3-55

D

3 Features

D

SS Console (KX-T7040)

Description

The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console provides direct access to stations, a busy lamp display, as well as 16 PF (Programmable

Feature) buttons.

The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone (PT). System programming assigns the jack numbers of the DSS Console and its associated PT.

Up to two consoles can be installed per system. A PT can be paired with up to two DSS Consoles. The paired telephone user can carry out the following operations using the DSS Console.

• Direct access to an extension (Direct Station Selection)

• Quick access to an external party (One-Touch Dialing)

• Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension (The programmable One-Touch Transfer feature provides this simple operation.)

• Quick access to a system feature

• Changing the time (Day/Night/Lunch) service easily

(Day/Night/Lunch Button Assignment) — only for an

Operator and Manager

• Set and cancel the remote station lock control feature (Station

Lock Button Assignment) — only for an Operator and

Manager

The above features are activated simply by pressing the buttons on the console which were pre-programmed as feature buttons.

A DSS Console has two types of buttons as shown below.

DSS Console KX-T7040

DSS buttons

PF buttons

3-56 Features

3 Features

D

DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons: Used to access extensions, change the time (day/night/lunch) service, and set and cancel the Remote Station Lock Control feature. Each button is programmed to correspond to an extension. Pressing a button allows the user to call the corresponding extension. Each button also has an indicator (Busy Lamp Field), which shows the current state of the corresponding extension as shown in the Table below.

Light

Off

On

Flashing*

State of extension

Idle

Busy

FWD/DND is enabled.

Busy Lamp Field Table

*: When program [112] is assigned to “Enable”, the indicator will flash.

To meet the user’s various needs, DSS buttons can be changed to the other feature buttons.

PF (Programmable Feature) buttons marked as F1 through

F16: These buttons have no default settings. The paired telephone user can program the buttons for other feature buttons.

Conditions

• Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone using station programming.

• If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another number, the DSS button automatically changes to the new number. (Reprogramming is not necessary.)

• Indicating the FWD/DND status of corresponding extensions using a

DSS button indication is programmable.



2.3.4 Extension Connection



[003] DSS Console Port Assignment

[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console

[112] DSS Console Indication Mode



DSS Console Features RRRRRRRRRR User Manual

Station Programming



Button, Flexible




— User Manual



Features 3-57

E

3 Features

E

lectronic Station Lockout

Description

Allows an extension user to lock their station so that other users cannot make outgoing outside calls. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock the station. The same code is used to unlock it. The manager or operator can cancel this feature for all extensions.

Conditions

• Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are permitted on the locked station.

• Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout. If the operator or manager sets Remote Station Lock on a station that has already been locked by the station user, the user cannot unlock it.

• A toll restriction class can be assigned for this feature. Certain types of outgoing outside calls are permitted depending on the assigned toll restriction class.



[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension

[312] Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class




Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class



— User Manual


Operator/Manager Features

Electronic Station Lockout — CANCEL ALL

3-58 Features

3 Features

E

E

mergency Call

Description

Allows the extension user to call a pre-assigned emergency number regardless of any restrictions.

Conditions

• Up to five emergency numbers can be stored. “911” is already stored by the default setting.

• An emergency number can be dialed even in the following cases:

— in Account Code – Verify – All and Forced modes,

— in any toll restriction COS number, and

— in Electronic Station Lockout.



[309] Emergency Dial Number Set


None



— User Manual

Emergency Call

E

nd-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through)

Description

DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies. This system allows a proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during a call in progress.

Conditions

• If the line dial type is assigned to DTMF, the Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing sequence is finished and the call is established.

• If the line dial type is assigned to pulse, the Tone Through mode is established after the dialing sequence is finished and the “ #” buttons are pressed (Pulse to Tone Conversion).





Dial Type Selection



Not applicable.

Features 3-59

E

3 Features

E

xecutive Busy Override – Extension

Description

Allows a pre-assigned extension user to interrupt an existing extension call, either between two inside parties or an external and inside party, to establish a three-party conference call. Extension users can prevent this feature from being executed by another extension user (Executive Busy Override Deny).

Conditions


Executive Busy Override.

• This feature will not work if the extension has set Executive Busy

Override Deny or Data Line Security.

• When a three-party call is changed to a two-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. This tone can be disabled by system programming.




[608] Executive Busy Override



Conference

Data Line Security



— User Manual

Executive Busy Override — Extension

3-60 Features

3 Features

E

E

xecutive Busy Override – Outside (CO) Line

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to interrupt an existing outside call, either between two external parties or an external and inside party, to establish a three-party conference call. Extension users can prevent this feature from being executed by another extension user

(Executive Busy Override Deny).

Conditions


Executive Busy Override.

• This feature will not work if the extension has set Executive Busy

Override Deny or Data Line Security.

• When a three-party call is changed to a two-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. This tone can be disabled by system programming.







Conference

Data Line Security



— User Manual

Executive Busy Override — Outside (CO) Line

Features 3-61

E

3 Features

E

xtension Group

Description

The system supports eight extension groups. Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another group member (Group Call Pickup) or can make a voice announcement to another group member (Paging – Group). In addition, the Station

Hunting feature can be enabled for each extension group. A DISA ring group is a specific extension group.

Condition

• Each extension should belong to an extension group, but cannot belong to more than one group.






Call Pickup, Group



Not applicable.

Paging – Group

Station Hunting

3-62 Features

3 Features

E

E

xternal Feature Access

Description

Allows an extension user to access the features of a host PBX or

Central Office, such as Call Waiting, etc. This is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a flash signal.

Conditions

• This feature is effective only during an outside call. However, if the

FLASH feature (Disconnection signal) is activated by the user, this feature will not work.

• The flash time must be assigned as required by the host PBX or outside

(CO) line.

• With a proprietary telephone, the FLASH button is used to perform this feature . With a single line telephone, flashing the hookswitch and entering the feature number are used to perform this feature .

• During outside calls, a FLASH stored in System Speed Dialing,

Personal Speed Dialing or One-Touch Dialing features as External

Feature Access, not as a Flash.




[418] Flash Time



Flash

Host PBX Access



— User Manual

External Feature Access

Features 3-63

F

3 Features

F

acsimile Detection

Description

When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by Direct

Inward System Access (DISA), it automatically connects the specified facsimile extension.

Conditions

• The extension which can receive facsimile data must be assigned by system programming.

• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card must be installed.












None

F

lash

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up by using the FLASH button.

Conditions

• System programming may be required to perform this feature properly.

• Pressing the FLASH button re-starts the conversation duration, outputs an SMDR record and checks the toll restriction COS number again.




[418] Flash Time






— User Manual

Flash

3-64 Features

3 Features

H

H

andset/Headset Selection

Description

The system supports the use of headsets on proprietary telephones

(KX-T7030 and KX-T7130 only).

Conditions

• The headset is an user supplied item.

• To set the headset mode on a PT, use the handset/headset selector provided on the set and/or the headset.




None


Configuration

—User Manual

Initial Settings

H

ands-free Answerback

Description

Allows the speakerphone proprietary telephone user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset, if the user has set the hands-free answerback mode. If the user receives an intercom call in this mode, a hands-free conversation is established immediately after the user hears a beep and the caller hears a confirmation tone.

Conditions

• The hands-free answerback mode is set or canceled by pressing the

AUTO ANSWER button.

• This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone calls.




None



—User Manual

Hands-free Answerback

Features 3-65

H

3 Features

H

ands-free Operation

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to dial and talk to the other party without lifting the handset. Pressing the appropriate button provides the hands-free mode.

Conditions

• This feature can be utilized by pressing one of the following buttons when the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off:

SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, INTERCOM button, or CO button.

• The KX-T7050 and the KX-T7055 can be used for hands-free dialing operations, etc., but cannot be used for a hands-free conversation.




None



—User Manual

Hands-free Operation

3-66 Features

3 Features

H

H

old Alarm/Hold Recall

Description

Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre-determined time. If the timer expires, ringing or an alarm tone is generated as a reminder to the user who held the call. If the user is on-hook and their SP-PHONE/MONITOR button is off, the phone will ring. If the user is off-hook or in the hands-free mode when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be sent to the built-in speaker of a proprietary telephone (PT) or the handset receiver of a single line telephone at 15-second intervals.

Conditions

• Hold Recall and Hold Alarm can be disabled by programming.

• During hold recall, a display PT indicates the held party.

• An Alarm tone is sent as follows.

15 s

• While the Alarm tone is being sent, a display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15-second intervals in synch with the tone.

• This feature will not work if the extension has set Data Line Security.








Data Line Security


Not applicable.

Call Hold, Exclusive – Intercom

Call Hold, Exclusive – Outside (CO)

Line

Features 3-67

H

3 Features

H

ost PBX Access

Description

The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting a line from the host to an outside (CO) line in the Advanced Hybrid System.

Conditions



[403] Host PBX Access Codes

[417] Pause Time


• A Host PBX Access Code is required to access outside (CO) lines of the host PBX.

• A pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the user-dialed Host

PBX Access Code and the digits which follow (Automatic Pause

Insertion). Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that outside (CO) line group.

• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External

Feature Access).



Pause Insertion, Automatic


Not applicable.

3-68 Features

3 Features

I

ntercept Routing

Description

Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls via DISA.

There are two types of Intercept Routing.

Condition

• The Intercept Routing feature works in the following cases.

(1) When nothing is dialed after the dial tone or OGM is sent to the caller.

(2) When the call is not answered within a programmed time. This is called Intercept Routing — No Answer (IRNA).









None


Not applicable.

I

Features 3-69

I

3 Features

I

ntercom Calling

Description

Allows an extension user to call another extension user within the system.

Conditions

• Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by system programming.

• Names can be given to extension numbers by system programming. An extension number and a name, if programmed, will be shown on the display PT during an intercom call.

• DSS buttons permit one-touch access to an extension and provide the

Busy Lamp Field.

• After dialing an extension number, the user will hear one of the following.

Ringback tone: indicates the other extension is being called.

Busy tone: indicates the other extension is busy.

Do Not Disturb tone: indicates the other extension has assigned

DND.

• A proprietary telephone user can select one of the Intercom Alert modes,

Voice Call or Tone Call. Voice Call informs the called party of an incoming call with the calling party’s voice, while Tone Call uses a ring tone. The calling party can only switch the pre-set mode at the called extension, from Voice Call to Tone Call.








Intercom Alert Assignment



Busy Lamp Field




—User Manual

Intercom Calling

Switching to Tone Alert

3-70 Features

3 Features

L

L

ED Indication, Intercom

Description

The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator of the INTERCOM button indicates the line condition using a variety of lighting patterns. This allows the user to see the current state of the intercom line. The table below shows the lighting patterns and the intercom line conditions.

INTERCOM Button

Off

Green On

Flashing green slowly

Flashing green moderately

Flashing green rapidly

INTERCOM Status

Idle

Intercom call / Conference established

Intercom call on hold

Intercom call exclusive hold

Incoming intercom / Doorphone call

Conditions

None





Busy Lamp Field


Not applicable.

Features 3-71

L

3 Features

L

ED Indication, Outside (CO) Line

Description

The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the buttons associated with outside (CO) lines show the line conditions using a variety of lighting patterns. This allows the user to see which lines are idle and which lines are in use. The table below shows the lighting patterns for different line conditions.

LED Indicator

Off

Green On

Flashing green slowly

Flashing green moderately

Flashing red rapidly

Red On

Flashing red slowly

Outside (CO) Line Status

Idle

I-use

I-hold

I-Exclusive Hold /

Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line call /

Unattended Conference

Incoming call

Other-use

Other-hold

Flashing light patterns

Flashing slowly

Flashing moderately

Flashing rapidly

1 s

Condition

• A slow flashing red indication only appears on a S-CO button.



Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button,

Other-CO (O-CO) Button,

Single-CO (S-CO) Button



Button, Group-CO (G-CO)

Button, Other-CO (O-CO)

Button, Single-CO (S-CO)


Not applicable.

3-72 Features

3 Features

L

imited Call Duration

Description

Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call when a specific timer expires. A warning tone is sent to the caller

15 seconds before the time-limit.

Conditions

None






Call Forwarding – to an Outside (CO) Line





Not applicable.

L

Features 3-73

L

3 Features

L

ine Access, Automatic

Description

Allows an extension user to dial the automatic line access number (9) and access an idle line from the assigned outside (CO) lines.

Conditions

• Each extension is subject to system programming items to access outside (CO) lines.

• This feature requires a CO button (G-CO, O-CO or S-CO) assignment on a proprietary telephone (PT). Dialing the line access code selects a

CO button on a PT according to the priority.

S-CO > G-CO (on a hunted outside (CO) line)

• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.

• After an outside (CO) line is seized, the system waits for a programmed time before dialing.



[206] Dialing Start Time






Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing



— User Manual

Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic

3-74 Features

3 Features

L

L

ine Access, Direct

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to select an outside (CO) line by pressing an idle CO button, which automatically establishes the hands-free operation mode and allows the user to perform On-Hook

Dialing. The user does not need to press the SP-PHONE button,

MONITOR button, or lift the handset.

Conditions

• There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed at an extension: Single-CO button, Group-CO button and Other-CO button.















Button, Other-CO (O-CO)





— User Manual

Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic,

Line Access, Individual,

Line Access, Outside (CO) Line Group

Features 3-75

L

3 Features

L

ine Access, Individual

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user one-button access to an outside

(CO) line without having to dial a line access code.

Conditions


• This feature requires a Single-CO (S-CO) button assigned to a proprietary telephone.















—User Manual

Outward Dialing – Line Access, Individual

3-76 Features

3 Features

L

L

ine Access, Outside (CO) Line Group

Description

Allows an extension user to access an outside (CO) line group. An idle line is selected from the outside (CO) line group. To specify an outside (CO) line group, dial the feature number (8) and the desired outside (CO) line group number (1 through 6). A proprietary telephone user can also specify an outside (CO) line group by pressing a Group-CO button.

Conditions

• An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified outside (CO) line group.

• Group-CO buttons must be programmed prior to use.

• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.


















— User Manual

Outward Dialing – Line Access, Outside (CO) Line Group

Features 3-77

L

3 Features

L

ine Preference – Incoming (No Line/Prime Line/Ringing Line)

Description

A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences.

(1) No Line Preference

No line is selected when the user goes off-hook. They must select a line to answer an incoming call.

(2) Prime Line Preference

The user can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call on that line, when multiple calls are received simultaneously.

(3) Ringing Line Preference

When the user goes off-hook, they can answer a call ringing at their telephone.

Conditions

• Setting a new line preference feature will cancel the previous setting.

• If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a line other than the prime line, it cannot be answered just by going off-hook. The Prime Line should be assigned to a Single-CO button.

• If Ringing Line Preference is selected, going off-hook during the delay time will not answer a line programmed for “delayed ringing”.

• A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and cannot be changed.









Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming


None


Basic Operation

—User Manual

Receiving Calls

3-78 Features

3 Features

L

L

ine Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line/No Line/Prime Line)

Description

A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences.

(1) Idle Line Preference:

When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to an idle line.

An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned lines.

(2) No Line Preference:

No line is selected when the user goes off-hook. They must select a line to make a call.

(3) Prime Line Preference:

When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to the preassigned line. Assign a prime line beforehand.

Conditions

• Setting a new line preference feature will cancel the previous setting.

• To set Prime Line Preference, select one prime line from the outside

(CO) lines.

• The outside (CO) lines to be used must be programmed.

• To select Idle Line Preference, the outside (CO) lines available should be programmed. Also, the outside (CO) lines available for Automatic

Line Access should be assigned.

• The user can override the Idle/Prime Line Preference temporarily to select a specific line. To select it, press the desired line access button

(INTERCOM or CO button) before going off-hook or pressing the

SP-PHONE/MONITOR button.










Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing





Basic Operation

— User Manual

Making Calls

Features 3-79

L

3 Features

L

ive Call Screening (LCS) †

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor their voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call. The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of two ways — Hands-free Mode or Private Mode.

Hands-free Mode

The voice mailbox is monitored through the built-in speaker of the proprietary telephone.

Private Mode

The proprietary telephone emits an alert tone when callers are connected to the voice mailbox. To monitor the call, the user presses the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button or the LCS button.

Alert tone

1 s

To intercept the call in either Hands-free or Private mode, press the

SP-PHONE button or the LCS button.

Conditions

• When the extension user is having a conversation, a Call Waiting tone will be heard if Call Waiting has been enabled. The user can put the existing call on hold before accessing LCS.

• A flexible CO and DSS (Direct Station Selection) button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening button.

• To prevent unauthorized monitoring, a three-digit password must be set by the LCS user. If the user forgets their password, it can be cleared by the operator or manager.



Flexible Button Assignment – Live Call Screening (LCS) Button,

Live Call Screening (LCS) Cancel Button

Live Call Screening Mode Set


RRRRRRRRR User Manual

Station Programming


None



— User Manual

Live Call Screening (LCS)

† Available when the KX-TA624 is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System (one that supports APT Integration; KX-TVS50).

3-80 Features

3 Features

L

L

ockout

Description

If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, both parties will be disconnected from the speech path automatically. This feature applies to extension and outside calls. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before it is disconnected.

Condition

• For a single line telephone, if nothing is dialed within a certain period of time after the other party goes on-hook, a reorder tone will be sent to the single line telephone and then it will be disconnected from the speech path.




None



— User Manual

Lockout

Features 3-81

L

L

og-In/Log-Out

Description

Conditions

3 Features

Assigns an extension to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) a hunting or ring group. Extensions in log-out status will not receive calls by

Station Hunting or DISA but will receive other calls, unlike the

DND feature.

• There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status.

• The lighting patterns and status of the Log-In/Log-Out button are shown below.

lighting pattern

Red On

Off

Log-In/Log-Out button Status

Log-Out

Log-In



Flexible Button Assignment – Log-In/Log-Out Button




Ring Group

Station Hunting



— User Manual

Log-In/Log-Out

3-82 Features

3 Features

M

M

anager Extension

Description

The extension connected to Jack 01 becomes the system manager.

This extension can perform system programming and the following manager services.

• Canceling the Call Log Lock and Electronic Station Lockout

• Changing the Day/Night/Lunch mode manually

• Recording and playing the outgoing message

• Setting/Canceling/Confirming the Timed Reminder (Wake-up

Call) remotely

• Setting/Clearing the Remote Station Lock Control

• Setting the Date and Time

• Setting the extension passwords

Conditions

None




None



— User Manual

Features 3-83

M

3 Features

M

essage Waiting

Description

The system supports the feature to notify the called party of a message waiting. A proprietary telephone user with a MESSAGE button, knows there is a message if the LED on the MESSAGE button lights red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button can call back the called party or listen to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System.

Conditions

• For a proprietary telephone which does not have a MESSAGE button, such as the KX-T7055, this feature is not available.

• Canceling the message can be performed from the extension sending it or from the extension receiving it.

• Each extension can have a maximum of 8 simultaneous messages.

• Messages are always left at the original extension. They cannot be sent to a Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination.



Flexible Button Assignment – Return to Message Waiting (MESSAGE)

Button



Call Forwarding

Station Hunting

Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVS50

Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100



—User Manual

Message Waiting

Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVS50/KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

3-84 Features

3 Features

M

M

icrophone Mute

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy.

Conditions

• The user’s voice will only be muted during a hands-free conversation.

• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.




None



— User Manual

Microphone Mute (— for KX-T7020/KX-T7030/KX-T7130 only)

M

ixed Station Capacities

Description

This system supports a wide range of telephone sets, not only

Proprietary Telephones (PT) in the Advanced Hybrid System, but also single line rotary telephones (10 pps/20 pps, using dial pulse signals) and single line push-button dialing telephones (touch tone).

The hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an extension modular jack without an adaptor.

Condition

• If a telephone is replaced with another one, the previous stored data

(such as button features) remains.







None


Not applicable.

Features 3-85

M

3 Features

M

odule Expansion

Description

The KX-TA624 starts with 3 outside (CO) line jacks and 8 extension jacks.

They can be expanded by installing expansion cards.

• A 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card adds 3 outside (CO) line jacks and 8 extension jacks.

• An 8 Extension Expansion Card adds 8 extension jacks.

The KX-TA624 can have one 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion

Card and one 8 Extension Expansion Card. Thus, the KX-TA624 can have 3 or 6 outside (CO) line jacks and 8, 16 or 24 extension jacks.

Conditions


None

Station 2, Installation

2.4.4 Installing a 3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 Extension Expansion Card (KX-TA62470)







Not applicable.

3-86 Features

3 Features

M

M

usic on Hold

Description

Conditions

While an external party is on hold, music is automatically activated.

• Operations such as Call Hold, Exclusive Call Hold or Call Transfer activate Music on Hold.

• A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio, must be connected to the system. One external music source can be connected to the system.

• A music source is used for Music on Hold and/or BGM. System programming may require enabling Music On Hold.



2.3.6 External Music Source Connection








Not applicable.

Features 3-87

O

3 Features

O

ne-Touch Dialing

Description

One-Touch Dialing offers a proprietary telephone (PT) user onetouch access to a desired party or system feature. This is activated by storing an extension number, telephone number or a feature number (up to 24-digits) in an One-Touch Dialing button. The number of buttons available depends on the type of PT. One-Touch

Dialing buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons.

Conditions

• An account code can be stored into an One-Touch Dialing button.

• Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing and manual dialing can be used at the same time.

• The user can store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One-Touch Dialing buttons. In this case, the line access code should be stored in the first button.



Flexible Button Assignment – One-Touch Dialing Button


Station Programming


None



— User Manual

One-Touch Dialing


One-Touch Dialing

One-Touch Access for System Features

3-88 Features

3 Features

O

O

ne-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button

Description

This feature, if programmed, allows the Direct Station Selection

(DSS) Console and the proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly transfer it to an extension. While talking to an external party, pressing a DSS button on the console or a proprietary telephone provides automatic hold and transfer. There is no need to press the TRANSFER button. The extension starts ringing immediately.

Condition

• If “With Transfer” is assigned, the user transfers an outside call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by the DSS button.









— User Manual



Call Transfer

Features 3-89

O

3 Features

O

perator

Description

The system supports one operator. Any extension can be designated as an operator.

The extension assigned as the operator has the ability to perform the following operations.

• Setting the Date and Time

• Clearing the Call Log Lock and Electronic Station Lockout

• Recording and playing the outgoing message

• Setting/Clearing the Remote Station Lock Control

• Changing the Day/Night/Lunch mode manually

• Setting/Canceling/Confirming the Timed Reminder (Wake-up

Call) remotely

Conditions

None



[008] Operator Assignment


None



— User Manual

O

perator Call

Description

Allows an extension user to call an extension operator by dialing the feature number. One extension can be assigned as the operator.

Condition

• If an operator is not assigned, this feature is not available and the user will hear a reorder tone.





None



— User Manual

Operator Call

3-90 Features

3 Features

O

O

utgoing Message (OGM)

Description

Allows the extension assigned as the operator or manager to record an outgoing voice message. This message is played when a caller accesses the DISA feature.

After recording the message, the operator or manager can also play it back for confirmation.

The following are some examples of OGM and flow chart.

Case 1: Receives 2 calls at a time – OGM for DISA.

(Do not want customers to be kept waiting.)

System

OGM 1

DISA with

OGM

Outside Call

To the designated destination

OGM 2

DISA with

OGM

Outside Call


OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”

OGM2: Same as OGM 1

Required Settings: [502] “MODE1”

[414]-[416] “DISA1”

Case 2: Uses the OGM in the day, night and lunch modes

– OGM for DISA.

(In the day mode)

System

OGM 1

DISA with

OGM

Outside Call


(In the night mode)

Outside Call

OGM 2

System

DISA with

OGM

The call is disconnected by assigning “Disconnect” for

DISA 2 in program

[510] “DISA No Dial Mode”.


OGM2: “We are sorry but our office is closed for the day.”


[414]-[416] “DISA1” for OGM1, “DISA2” for OGM2

Features 3-91

O

3 Features

Case 3: Uses a different OGM for outside (CO) lines


System

(Outside line 1)

Outside Call

OGM 1

DISA with

OGM


(Outside line 2)

Outside Call

OGM 2

DISA with

OGM



OGM2: “This is B company. To contact Mr. A, press 101. To contact Mr.

B, press 102.”


[414]-[416] “DISA1” for the A company outside (CO) line(s).

“DISA2” for the B company outside (CO) line(s).

Case 4: Uses a different OGM when the line is busy


System

OGM 1

DISA with

OGM


Outside Call

The line is busy.

OGM 2

DISA with

OGM

(If the operator is selected.)

To the Operator


OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. If you want to call the operator, press 0.”


[414]-[416] “DISA1”

[506] “DISA2”

3-92 Features

3 Features

Conditions

• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the

OGM.

• The maximum recording time for the OGM is 30 seconds.

• Up to two outgoing messages are available.













— User Manual


O

Features 3-93

O

3 Features

O

utside (CO) Line Connection Assignment

Description

This allows a user to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to their system. This prevents the user from calling a line which is not connected. When the user uses Automatic Line

Access, an idle line is selected from the ones connected.

Conditions

• If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line, a reorder tone will sound to indicate that the line is out of use.

• This is effective for all outgoing calls including DISA.





None


Not applicable.

O

utside (CO) Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing

Description

Allows a user to assign an outside (CO) line used for outgoing calls. This feature is useful in preventing unauthorized toll calls.

Conditions

• When an extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed outside (CO) line, a reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use that outside (CO) line.

• Day, Night and Lunch Service are programmed individually. (Time

Service)





None


Not applicable.

3-94 Features

3 Features

O

O

utside (CO) Line Group

Description

Outside (CO) lines can be grouped into up to six outside (CO) line groups. This allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a specific outside (CO) line, since an outside (CO) line is automatically selected from the designated outside (CO) line group. All outside (CO) lines belong to an outside (CO) line group.

Condition

• Each outside (CO) line can only belong to one outside (CO) line group.





None


Not applicable.

Features 3-95

P

3 Features

P

AGING FEATURES – SUMMARY

Description

Paging allows a user to make a voice announcement to many people at the same time. Their message is announced over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and/or an external speaker

(external pager). The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. Making and answering a page is possible from either a proprietary or single line telephone. The user can page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call (Paging and Transfer).

It is also possible to deny a page.

The paging features are classified as follows.

Paging – All

Paging – External

Paging – Group

P

aging – All

Description

Allows the user to make a voice announcement from the speakers of proprietary telephones and external paging device (external pager).

Conditions

• A confirmation tone is sent to the extensions, when a page is sent or answered.

• A confirmation tone is sent to the external pager, before the voice announcement. The tone can be disabled.

• A ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page.



2.3.5 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection





None



— User Manual

Paging — All

Paging and Transfer

Paging — ANSWER

Paging — DENY

3-96 Features

3 Features

P

P

aging – External

Description

Allows the user to make a voice announcement using an external paging device (external pager). One pager can be connected. Any telephone user can answer the Paging – External.

Conditions

• An external pager must be connected beforehand.

• A confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager, when a page is sent. The tone to the external pager can be disabled.



2.3.5 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection





None



— User Manual

Paging — External

Paging — ANSWER

Paging and Transfer

Paging — DENY

P

aging – Group

Description

Allows the user to select an extension group and make a voice announcement. All the proprietary telephones in the group will receive the page. If a member of the paged group answers the page, they can talk to the person through the connected line.

Conditions

• To select all groups, page all of the extensions.

• A confirmation tone is sent when a page is sent or answered.





Extension Group



— User Manual

Paging — External

Paging — ANSWER

Paging and Transfer

Paging — DENY

Features 3-97

P

3 Features

P

aralleled Telephone

Description

Any analog proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with single line devices, such as a single line telephone, facsimile and data terminal.

When a parallel connection is made, an extension user can make and answer a call using either telephone.

Conditions

• A proprietary telephone (PT) can perform normal operations even if program [610] is assigned to “Disable”.

• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is having a call, a three-party call will be established. If one user goes on-hook, the other user will continue with the call.

• When receiving a call, both the PT and the single line telephone will ring except when the PT is in the Hands-free Answerback mode.

• When the single line telephone is operating, the display and LED indicator on the paired PT will work as if the PT is in operation.

• The extension user cannot originate a call from the single line telephone if the PT is:

— playing BGM,

— in programming mode, or

— receiving a page announcement over the built-in speaker.

• The Call Waiting tone can only be heard by a PT.

• The paired single line telephone will not ring in the following cases.

— When the PT user sets the Hands-free Answerback feature.

— When the voice alerting mode is set on the PT.

• The paired single line telephone cannot use the following features.

— Call Splitting

— Conference

— External Feature Access

— Door Opener while talking to the doorphone

— Pickup Dialing

• The paired single line telephone user should not enter “49” or “ ” before the account code. They cannot enter the account code during or after a call.



2.3.7 Paralleled Telephone Connection (for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone)





None



— User Manual

Paralleled Telephone Connection

3-98 Features

3 Features

P

P

ause Insertion, Automatic

Description

This feature is used to insert a pre-assigned pause between the outside (CO) line access number, the host PBX code, carrier code or code assigned in program [311] and the dialed number.

Conditions



[300] Carrier Code Assignment

[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes


[417] Pause Time


• This feature requires programming the host PBX codes, carrier codes and automatic pause insertion codes as well as the pause duration beforehand.

• This feature works for Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing, Last Number

Redial, Saved Number Redial, Pickup Dialing, Call Forwarding – to

Outside (CO) Line as well as for normal calls.

• Pressing the PAUSE button in a dialing number inserts a pause for a preassigned time.


Host PBX Access

Toll Restriction


Not applicable.

Features 3-99

P

3 Features

P

ersonal Speed Dialing

Description

Allows an extension user to store frequently dialed numbers in order to place a call quickly. This is done by dialing the feature number and a speed dial number, from 0 to 9. Up to 10 numbers with a maximum of 24 digits per number can be stored in each telephone.

Conditions

• For PT users, it is impossible to use this feature if One-Touch Dialing buttons are assigned to PF buttons. If the user assigns, a personal speed dialing number, the number stored in the One-Touch Dialing button will be overwritten. PF Buttons F1 through F10 correspond to speed dialing numbers as follows.

F1 — 0

F2 — 1

F6 — 5

F7 — 6

F3 — 2

F4 — 3

F8 — 7

F9 — 8

F5 — 4 F10 — 9

• If a single line telephone user wants to check the stored number, exchange the telephone with a proprietary telephone. PF buttons

F1 through F10 correspond to speed dialing numbers 0 through 9. Press the desired PF button to check the number.

• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.





One-Touch Dialing



— User Manual

Personal Speed Dialing

3-100 Features

3 Features

P

P

ickup Dialing

Description

Allows a single line telephone user to make an outgoing call by going off-hook, if the user has stored the telephone number beforehand. This feature is also known as Hot Line.

Conditions

• A proprietary telephone and rotary telephone cannot program this feature.

• The user uses a feature number to activate or deactivate pickup dialing.

• If the feature is activated and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone will be generated for the delay time and then dialing will start. During the delay time, the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialing feature.



[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time


None



— User Manual

Pickup Dialing (Hot Line) (— Single Line Telephone only)

Features 3-101

P

3 Features

P

ower Failure Transfer

Description

If a power failure occurs, or the system is off-line, specific extension telephones are automatically connected to specific outside (CO) lines. This provides an outside (CO) line call between the following extensions and outside (CO) lines.

Outside (CO) line 1 is connected to extension jack number 01.

Outside (CO) line 4 is connected to extension jack number 09.

A single line telephone can work during a power failure. Connect a single line telephone to the above extension jack.

Conditions

• All other conversations, except the above combinations, are disconnected during a power failure.

• Only an outside (CO) line can have a conversation. All other features do not work.

Connection References


2.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Connection


2.5

Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer




None



— User Manual

Power Failure Transfer

3-102 Features

3 Features

P

P

ulse to Tone Conversion

Description

This feature allows the extension user to change from pulse dialing to tone (DTMF) dialing so that the user can access special services, such as computer-accessed long distance calls or voice mail services.

Conditions

• This feature only works for outside (CO) lines which have set the Pulse

Dialing mode or Call Blocking mode.

• The user can select the dial mode for each outside (CO) line using the

Dial Type Selection feature.

• Changing from tone to pulse is not possible.



[119] Redialing After Pulse to Tone Conversion

[401] Dial Mode



Dial Type Selection



— User Manual


Features 3-103

R

3 Features

R

edial, Last Number

Description

Every telephone in the system automatically saves the last telephone number dialed to an outside (CO) line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again.

Conditions

• With a proprietary telephone, the REDIAL button is used to carry out

Last Number Redial. With a single line telephone, the feature number is used.





— User Manual

Redial, Last Number

R

edial, Saved Number

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number and redial the number afterwards. The user can store it during a conversation with an outside (CO) line. The saved number can be redialed until another number is stored.

Conditions

• As the SAVE button is not provided on a PT, except for the KX-T7130, a flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button.



Flexible Button Assignment – SAVE Button



Button, Flexible



— User Manual

Redial, Saved Number

3-104 Features

3 Features

R

R

emote Station Lock Control

Description

The operator and manager are given the privilege of controling

Electronic Station Lockout and Call Log Lock at any station.

Conditions

• Remote Station Lock Control has higher priority over Electronic Station

Lockout and Call Log Lock. If Electronic Station Lockout or Call Log

Lock has already been set by the extension user and Remote Station

Lock is set by the operator or manager, canceling the lock is only possible by the operator or manager.

• Extension passwords must be assigned to the operator and manager extensions beforehand.

• The Electronic Station Lockout — CANCEL ALL feature can cancel this feature.

• When the same extension number Station Lock button is assigned on the operator and manager DSS Consoles, one can set and the other can cancel the feature, and vice versa.

• A toll restriction COS number can be assigned for this feature. Certain types of outgoing outside calls are permitted depending on the assigned toll restriction COS number.



[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension



Station Programming — Station Lock Button Assignment (Operator and

Manager only)



Call Log, Incoming





— User Manual


Extension Password Set (Manager only)


Features 3-105

R

3 Features

R

ing Group

Description

All extensions in a ring group ring simultaneously if the ring group is assigned as the destination of AA (DISA built-in auto attendant) number. A ring group is a specific extension group.

Conditions

None









Not applicable.

R

inging, Delayed

Description

A telephone is originally set to ring immediately. This feature can be changed to delayed ringing or no ringing (disable) on an outside

(CO) line number basis.

Conditions

• This feature does not apply to DISA or DIL calls. If the destination is a ring group, the delayed ringing feature will work.

• The extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or the delay time by pressing the flashing button.







Direct In Lines (DIL)


Ring Group


Not applicable.

3-106 Features

3 Features

R

R

inging, Discriminating

Description

Allows the extension user to identify an incoming call by its ringing pattern. (See section 5.1, “Tone/Ring Tone”.)

Conditions

• If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on-hook extension simultaneously, priority is generally on a “first-come, first-serve” basis.

For proprietary telephones (PT), when the Prime Line Preference –

Incoming feature has been set, this line has priority.

• A PT user can select a desired ringing pattern for each outside (CO) line, intercom, and the doorphone ringing tone for each doorphone.








Ringing Pattern Selection for Intercom Calls and Outside (CO) Lines

Ringing Tone Selection for Doorphones


Not applicable.

Features 3-107

R

3 Features

R

inging Pattern Selection for Intercom Calls and Outside (CO) Lines

Description

Allows an extension user to select the desired ringing pattern for an intercom call and each outside (CO) line. This distinguishes incoming outside calls from intercom calls.

Conditions

• There are three ringing patterns available. One of them can be assigned to an intercom call and an outside (CO) line. Available ringing patterns are as follows.

1 s

Single:

Double:

Triple:

• Each extension user can disable the outside (CO) line ringing tone by station programming.






Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection


None


Not applicable.

3-108 Features

3 Features

R

R

inging Tone Selection for Doorphones

Description

Allows an extension user to select the desired ringing or tone pattern for each doorphone. This distinguishes incoming doorphone calls.

A PT user will hear a tone with the assigned pattern and a single line telephone user will hear a ringing tone with the assigned pattern.

Condition

• There are four types of ringing tones as follows.

1 s

Single:

Double:

Triple:

S-Double:





None


Not applicable.

Features 3-109

R

3 Features

R

oom Monitor

Description

Allows a user to monitor another room or the front door through a proprietary telephone or doorphone without them knowing.

Conditions

• The extensions which can be monitored must be programmed.

• An access tone will not be sent to the monitored proprietary telephone when monitoring starts.

• If a doorphone is used as the room monitor, a doorphone access tone will be heard when monitoring starts. The tone can be disabled.

• This feature is not available for the KX-T7050 and KX-T7055.

• A single line telephone with a MUTE button can be used for monitoring.



[612] Room Monitor Assignment




Doorphone Call



— User Manual

Room Monitor

3-110 Features

3 Features

S

S

ecret Dialing

Description

Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered telephone number that normally appears on the display. The user can hide System Speed Dialing or One-Touch Dialing numbers assigned to flexible buttons on proprietary telephones and DSS

Consoles. When a display telephone user calls a Secret Dialing number, all or part of the number will not appear on the display.

Conditions

• When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the number to be concealed.

• The user can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number.

• Printing out the concealed parts on a SMDR can be assigned by system programming.



[001] System Speed Dialing Entry

[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing Printing


Flexible Button Assignment – One-Touch Dialing Button



One-Touch Dialing





— User Manual

Secret Dialing

Features 3-111

S

3 Features

S

tation Feature Clear

Description

Allows an extension user to cancel the features set on the user’s own telephone. The following features will be canceled by this feature.

Absent Message Capability – The message set on the telephone

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)

Background Music that has been turned on

Call Forwarding

Call Log, Incoming – Over-stored mode

Call Pickup Deny

Call Waiting disabled

Data Line Security


Executive Busy Override Deny

Log-In/Log-Out

Message Waiting – All the messages that have been left by other extension users

Pickup Dialing – The stored telephone number

Paging – Deny

Room Monitor

Timed Reminder

Voice Mail Integration

Conditions

None




None



— User Manual

Station Feature Clear

3-112 Features

3 Features

S

S

tation Hunting

Description

If a called extension is busy, Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension in the extension group. Idle extensions are automatically searched according to programming. Two hunting types are available as follows.

Circular hunting: The extensions are searched one time in numerical order until an idle one is found. If all extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard.

Terminate hunting: The extensions are searched from the destination jack until the call reaches the highest jack number in the group. If all higher number jacks are busy, the search will end and a busy tone will be heard.

One hunting type can be selected for each extension group.

To leave the hunting group temporarily, use the Log-Out function.

To rejoin, use the Log-In feature.

Condition

• If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb, Call Forwarding or

Log-Out, Station Hunting will skip the extension. However, Station

Hunting will not skip the extension which receives the call first, even if it has set Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding.



[100] Hunting Group Set

[101] Station Hunting Type




Call Forwarding

Do Not Disturb

Extension Group

Log-In/Log-Out


Not applicable.

Features 3-113

S

3 Features

S

tation Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Description

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically prints out detailed call information of outside calls. A printer connected to the

Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls, as well as print a hard copy of system programming. To print out the record of system programming items that have been assigned, use program [804] “System Data Dump”.

To print the call records, use program [802] “Incoming/Outgoing

Call Selection for Printing”, which allows a user to print out the following records.

• A record of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls

• A record of all incoming outside calls

An example of a printed call record:

3-114

Date Time Ext.

CO Dial number Duration Code

12/31/98 12:52PM 103 05

12/31/98 12:53PM 103 02

12/31/98 *12:54PM 101 02

12/31/98 1:04PM 103 06

12/31/98 1:04PM 102 05

12/31/98 1:05PM 103 01

12/31/98 1:06PM 103 01

12/31/98 1:06PM C-05 02

12/31/98 1:07PM 103 01

12/31/98 2:15PM 103 01

12/31/98 2:26PM 103 01

12/31/98 2:27PM 116 05

• • • •

•

•

(1)

•

•

(2)

•

•

(3)

•

•

(4)

12345678901234567890123456789012

<

< incoming incoming

092. . . 1438

>2013570846

00:00'16

00:01'43 . . . .

>1234567890123456 00:07'48 . . . .

00:00'06

. . . .

4536

00:00'09 . . . .

0

092123456789

0921234567

0921234567

00:00'08 . . . .

0

00:00'08 . . . .

00:00'17 . . . .

2

00:11'00 . . 13

0921234567

F/0927654321

9=0924567123

•

•

•

(5)

00:11'00 . 101

00:03'00 . . . .

00:13'55 . . . .

• •

•

•

(6)

•

•

(7)

Example of the SMDR printout format:

Explanation

(1) Date: shows the date of the call as month/day/year.

(2) Time: shows the time the call was started as Hour: Minute/AM or PM. “*” indicates a transferred call.

(3) Ext.: shows the extension number, etc. that engaged in the call.

“C-xx” indicates an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) call via DISA. The outside (CO) line which receives an incoming call is shown as xx.

(4) CO: shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call.

Features

3 Features

S

(5) Dial number

Outgoing call: shows the called party’s telephone number

(maximum 32 digits). Valid digits are 0 through 9, , # or P

(if the PAUSE button was pressed).

Received call: shows <incoming>. If a Caller ID is assigned to the other party, it will show <incoming> and the number.

An incoming call via DISA is shown as <DISA incoming>.

An incoming call via DIL is shown as <DIL incoming>.

(6) Duration: shows the duration of the call in hours/minutes/seconds.

(7) Code: shows the account code appended to the call, account code index number, the extension number which overrides toll restriction or the DISA security code status. Code “0” indicates a DISA incoming call without a DISA security code. Codes “1 to 4” indicate a DISA incoming call with DISA security code 01 to 04 respectively. DISA security codes are never printed out by SMDR.

Conditions

• This system can store information of up to 64 calls.

• This data is not deleted when the user resets the system.

• If FLASH is manually sent during a conversation to make another call without hanging up, etc., the call record will be printed out and a new record is started. “F/” will be printed at the top of the dial number on the new record.

• When a host PBX code is entered, “=” will be printed between the code and dialed number.



2.3.9 Printer and PC Connection





[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters


[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing

[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing Printing

[804] System Data Dump




None


Not applicable.

Features 3-115

S

3 Features

S

tation Programming

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone (PT) user to customize their extension according to their needs. The following programming items are available.

For a PT (KX-T7130; KX-T7020; KX-T7030; KX-T7050;

KX-T7055)





Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming/Outgoing

Station Programming Data Default Set

For a display PT (KX-T7130; KX-T7030) only,

Self-Extension Number Confirmation

For an operator and manager’s extension PT only,



Outgoing Message Recording/Playback

For the manager’s extension PT only,

Extension Password

Detailed information and programming instructions are described in the User Manual, Station Programming and Operator/Manager

Service Features.

Condition

• During station programming, a PT is regarded as busy.




RRR User Manual






None


Not applicable.

3-116 Features

3 Features

S

S

tation Programming Data Default Set

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to return all the following items programmed on the telephone to the default settings.

Programming Items




Default

Tone 1

Tone Call

Ring-all outside (CO) lines

Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming Ringing Line

Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing No Line

Station programming is used to set or cancel these items at individual telephones.

Condition

• This feature also cancels the Hands-free Answerback feature and pressing the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button in the Room Monitor feature.



Station Programming Data Default Set



Hands-free Answerback

Room Monitor

Station Programming


Not applicable.

Features 3-117

S

3 Features

S

ystem Data Default Set

Description

This system can re-initialize the system-programmed data. If all the programmed data is cleared, the system will restart using the default settings.

Condition

• The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.2,

“Default Values”.





None



2.9

System Data Clear

S

ystem Programming with a Proprietary Telephone

Description

This system can be programmed with a proprietary telephone (PT).

Proprietary telephones available for system programming are:

KX-T7130, and KX-T7030 (Display Proprietary Telephones).

An extension connected to JACK 01 is allowed to perform system programming.

For more information and programming instructions, refer to

Section 4, “System Programming”.

Conditions

• During system programming, the system operates normally.

• During system programming, the extension is regarded as busy.

• To access system administration, a valid password must be entered. The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.



[002] System Password


None


Not applicable.

3-118 Features

3 Features

S

S

ystem Speed Dialing

Description

This feature supports 100 abbreviated dial numbers that are available to all users. A system speed dial number is dialed out by pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button for a proprietary telephone and pressing “ ” for a single line telephone, and a

2-digit code (00 through 99). Up to one hundred telephone numbers

(32-digit) can be stored per system.

Conditions

• Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing can be assigned by system programming.

• Rotary single line telephones cannot use the feature.

[For proprietary telephone users only]

• Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing and manual dialing can be used together.




[301] Toll Restriction – System Speed Dialing Boundary Class



Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing



— User Manual


Features 3-119

T

3 Features

T

ime (Day/Night/Lunch) Service

Description

The system supports the day, night and lunch operation modes. The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for the day, night and lunch modes. The system operation for restricting toll calls can be programmed to prevent unauthorized toll calls in each mode.

Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Modes

The day/night/lunch modes can be changed either automatically at a pre-assigned time or manually by the operator or manager at any desired time.

Automatic Time Service: If a user selects the automatic changing mode, the system will change the day/night/lunch modes at the programmed time each day. The starting time of the day/night/lunch modes can be set for each day of the week.

Manual Time Service: If a user selects the manual changing mode, the operator or manager can change the day/night/lunch modes by dialing the feature number or pressing the day, night or lunch button.

Conditions

• The following programming items may be assigned differently for the day mode, night mode and lunch mode.






— Day/Night/Lunch



• The operator or manager can change the day, night or lunch mode even if the automatic changing mode is selected.



[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode

[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time


Station Programming — Day Button Assignment (Operator and Manager only)

Night Button Assignment (Operator and

Manager only)

Lunch Button Assignment (Operator and

Manager only)

3-120 Features

3 Features


None



— User Manual



Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Setting

T

Features 3-121

T

3 Features

T

ime-Out, Variable

Description

Provides timers to control various features.

The following timers are programmable.

System Timer Items

Call Duration Count Start Time

Call Forwarding Start Time

Dialing Start Time

Door Opener Time

Doorphone Ringing Time

Hold Recall Time

Range

5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 25 / 30 /

35 / 40 / 45 / 50 s / Instantly

(after dial)

5 / 10 / 15 / 20 s (delay)

0 / 250 / 500 / 750 / 1000 /

1250 / 1500 ms

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 s

15 / 30 s

30 s / 1 min / 1.5 min /

2 min / 3 min / 4 min /

5 min / 6 min / Disable

5 / 10 / 15 s Interdigit Time

Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line

Duration Time Limit

Pickup Dial Delay Time

Transfer Recall Time

1 – 32 min

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 s

15 s / 30 s / 1 min / 2 min

Outside (CO) Line Timer Items

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Disable / 62 / 70 / 78 / … /

606 / 614 ms

(8 ms increments)

Disconnect Time

Flash Time

Pause Time

0.5 / 1.5 / 4.0 s

80 / 100 / 160 / 300 / 600 /

900 / 1200 ms

1.5 / 2.5 / 3.5 / 4.5 s

Extension Timer Items

Delayed Ringing Assignment Immediate / 5 s / 10 s / 15 s

DISA Timer Items

DISA AA Wait Time

DISA Delayed Answer Time

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 s

0 / 3 / 6 / 12 s

DISA Ringing Time After Intercept 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 120 s

DISA Ringing Time Before Intercept 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 120 s

DISA Waiting Time After OGM 0 / 5 / 10 / 15 s

Intercept Time for Internal DISA 3 / 6 / 9 s

3-122 Features

3 Features










[208] Interdigit Time


[417] Pause Time

[418] Flash Time




[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM



[515] Intercept Time For Internal DISA



[709] Door Opener Time


None


Not applicable.

T

Features 3-123

T

3 Features

T

imed Reminder

Description

Each telephone can generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake-up tone or reminder. The alarm can be set to occur daily or just once.

Conditions

• Be sure that the system clock is working.

• Setting a new time clears the preset time.

• The alarm sounds for 30 seconds. To stop it, lift the handset or, with a proprietary telephone, press any button.

• There is no limit for the number of the extensions who can set Timed

Reminder at the same time.





Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)



— User Manual

Timed Reminder

T

imed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

Description

Allows the operator and manager to remotely set, cancel and confirm a wake-up call for an extension.

Conditions

• When either an operator/manager or extension sets a new time, the preset time is cleared.

• There is no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed

Reminder at the same time.

• Each extension user can cancel this feature.





Timed Reminder



— User Manual

Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)

3-124 Features

3 Features

T

oll Restriction

Description

T

Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls.

Every extension is programmed to belong to one of five TRS –

Classes of Service (COS). Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction class for the day mode, night mode and lunch mode.

There are five toll restriction COS numbers available. Toll restriction COS number 1 is the highest class and COS number 5 is the lowest. COS number 1 allows all toll calls. COS numbers 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls by combining pre-programmed deny and excepted codes.

Denied Code Classes

An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll restriction COS number between 2 and 5 is first checked against the assigned Denied Code Classes. If the first digits of the dialed number (not including the line access code) are not found in the class, the call can be made. There are five system programs for

Denied Code Classes: [302]–[305] Toll Restriction — Class 2 – 5

Denied Codes. Each program is used to assign denied codes for

Classes 2 through 5 respectively.

Each class can store up to 20 denied codes, each consisting of eleven digits.

Excepted Codes

These codes are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the Denied Codes is checked against the selected

Excepted Codes. If a match is found, the call can be made.

There is one system program for excepted codes: [306] Toll

Restriction — Exception Codes. Up to eighty excepted codes, each consisting of eleven digits, can be stored. The number of codes available depends on the COS number.

Features 3-125

T

3 Features

Applicable Denied Code Classes and Excepted Codes depend on the assigned toll restriction COS number of an extension as follows.

COS Number

1

2

3

4

5

Denied Codes

None

Codes for Class 2

Codes for Classes 2 and 3

Codes for Classes 2 to 4

Codes for Classes 2 to 5

Excepted Codes

None

All codes from Code number 01 to 80

15 codes from Code number 01 to 60



[Explanation]

COS 1: allows all calls.

COS 2: denies the 20 codes stored in Denied Code Class 2 assigned in program [302], except all codes stored in Code numbers

01 through 80 assigned in program [306].

COS 3: denies the 40 codes stored in Denied Code Classes 2 and 3 assigned in programs [302] and [303], except the 60 codes stored in Code numbers 01 through 60 assigned in program [306].

COS 4: denies the 60 codes stored in Denied Code Classes 2 through 4 assigned in programs [302] through [304], except the 40 codes stored in Code numbers 01 through 40 assigned in program [306].

COS 5: denies the 80 codes stored in Denied Code Classes 2 through 5 assigned in programs [302] through [305], except the 20 codes stored in Code numbers 01 through 20 assigned in program [306].

Example of Toll Restriction programming

Here is an example to explain the procedure for Toll Restriction programming.

1. Determining the application

Determine the dialing numbers that should be denied for COS numbers 2 through 5. (1 is fixed and does not require programming.)

3-126 Features

3 Features

T

[Entry Example]

COS number Denied Codes

Class 2 011xxxxxxxx

976xxxxxxxx

1xxx976xxxx

2

3

4

Class 2 011xxxxxxxx

976xxxxxxxx

1xxx976xxxx

Class 3 982xxxxxxxx

12xx975xxxx

Class 2 011xxxxxxxx

976xxxxxxxx

1xxx976xxxx

Class 3 982xxxxxxxx

12xx975xxxx

Class 4 0xxxxxxxxxx x0xxxxxxxxx x1xxxxxxxxx

5

Class 2 011xxxxxxxx

976xxxxxxxx

1xxx976xxxx

Class 3 982xxxxxxxx

12xx975xxxx

Class 4 0xxxxxxxxxx x0xxxxxxxxx x1xxxxxxxxx

Class 5 411xxxxxxxx

1xxx555xxxx

Note: “x” means a digit.

Excepted Codes

0112xxxxxxx

9762xxxxxxx

1xx8976xxxx

9824xxxxxxx

123x975xxxx

092xxxxxxxx x01xxxxxxxx x12xxxxxxxx x123xxxxxxx

4112xxxxxxx

12xx555xxxx

0112xxxxxxx

9762xxxxxxx

1xx8976xxxx

9824xxxxxxx

123x975xxxx


4112xxxxxxx

12xx555xxxx

0112xxxxxxx

9762xxxxxxx

1xx8976xxxx

9824xxxxxxx

123x975xxxx


4112xxxxxxx

0112xxxxxxx

9762xxxxxxx

1xx8976xxxx

9824xxxxxxx

123x975xxxx

Features 3-127

T

3 Features

2. Programming


— Day/Night/Lunch

Assign a Class of Service (COS) to each extension.

[Example]

Jack

01

08

.

.

24

02

03

.

.

COS (Day)

1

5

.

.

5

1

2

.

.

COS (Night)

1

5

.

.

1

5

4

.

.

COS (Lunch)

1

5

.

.

5

1

5

.

.

[Explanation]

If your extension is jack 03; a) You cannot make a call whose toll call number is “011”, because the number “011” is one of the Denied Codes for Class 2.

b) However, you can make a call whose toll call number is “0112”. The number, whose first 3 digits are “011”, is one of the Denied Codes for

Class 2, but the number “0112” is one of the Excepted Codes. The

Excepted Codes override the Denied Codes.

If your extension is jack 08; a) You cannot make a call whose toll call number is “123”, because the number “1xxx976xxx” is one of the Denied Codes for Class 2.

b) However, you can make a call whose toll call number is

“1234975680”. The number, whose first 3 digits are “123”, is one of the Denied Codes for Class 2, but the number “123x975xxx” is one of the Excepted Codes. The Excepted Codes override the Denied Codes.

3-128 Features

3 Features

Flow Chart of Toll Restriction

The user makes a toll call.

T

Is the call made by System Speed

Dialing? * 1

No

Yes

Yes

COS 1

Is the COS number higher than the System Speed

Dialing Boundary Class? * 2

No or Equal

What is the extension – COS number?

COS 2, 3, 4, 5

Is the dialed number found in the applicable Denied Codes?

Yes

No

Is the dialed number found in the applicable Excepted Codes?

No

Yes

The call is denied. A reorder tone is sent to the user.

The call is allowed.

* 1

* 2

System Speed Dial numbers are assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialing Entry”.

The System Speed Dialing Boundary Class is assigned in program [301] “Toll Restriction – System

Speed Dialing Boundary Class”.

Features 3-129

T

3 Features

Conditions

• Toll restriction checks are applied to the following features.

(1) Account Code Entry

(2) Dial Access, Automatic

(3) Dial Access, Outside (CO) Line Group

(4) Line Access, Individual

(5) Carrier Code Entry

(6) System Speed Dialing

• Emergency numbers, the Police or Fire Department, should be stored in program [309] “Emergency Dial Number Set” so that they are excepted from toll restriction.

• If a stored Host PBX access code or a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number, the subsequent telephone numbers will be checked for toll restriction.

• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be checked or not on the Toll Restriction code. This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central

Office exchange systems.



[125] Toll Restriction Check for and #


[211] No Dial Disconnection


[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class

[302]–[305] Toll Restriction — Class 2 – 5 Denied Codes

[306] Toll Restriction — Exception Codes


— Day/Night/Lunch



Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access





Not applicable.

3-130 Features

3 Features

T

T

oll Restriction for Special Carrier Access

Description

If the system has access to multiple telephone companies, access to a specific company requires a carrier code before the telephone number. Toll Restriction for these calls is activated by storing the carrier codes (maximum 20). If a stored carrier code is found in the dialed number, a toll restriction check starts with the subsequent telephone numbers.

Conditions

None






Toll Restriction


Not applicable.

Features 3-131

T

3 Features

T

oll Restriction for System Speed Dialing

Description

Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing is assigned separately from the extensions. There are five boundary classes available.

Extension COS number

1

2

3

4

5

C

C

C

C

1

System Speed Dialing Boundary Class

2 3 4 5

N N N N N

N

C

N

N

N

N

N

N

C

C

C

C

N

C

N

N

N = No restriction C = Checked

[Explanation]

The System Speed Dialing Boundary Class works with the COS number assigned to each extension.

(1) Boundary Class 5: all extension users can make system speed dialing calls without checking any COS number.

(2) Boundary Class 4: extensions with COS number 5 are checked. When the users make system speed dialing calls, toll restriction COS number

5 is applied to the numbers.

(3) Boundary Class 3: extensions with COS numbers 4 and 5 are checked.

When the users make system speed dialing calls, toll restriction COS numbers 4 and 5 are applied to the numbers.

(4) Boundary Class 2: extensions with COS numbers 3 through 5 are checked. When the users make system speed dialing calls, toll restriction COS numbers 3 through 5 are applied to the numbers.

(5) Boundary Class 1: extensions with COS numbers 2 through 5 are checked. When the users make system speed dialing calls, toll restriction COS numbers 2 through 5 are applied to the numbers.

Conditions

None



[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class




Toll Restriction

Walking COS



— User Manual

Toll Restriction Override – Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing

3-132 Features

3 Features

T

T

oll Restriction Override by Account Codes

Description

Allows an extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted extension. The user can carry out this feature by entering a pre-assigned account code before dialing the telephone number. The user can make a toll call with the

COS number 2.

Conditions

• The account code “Verify - Toll” mode at an extension permits users to override their toll restrictions.

• This feature can be used on extensions assigned to toll restriction COS numbers 3 through 5. The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed.

• If the user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid one, a regular toll restriction check is done.

• When a user makes a call using this feature, it will appear on the SMDR printout with either the entered 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the entered account code. This selection is set in program [805]

“SMDR Account Code Selection”.

• Users can also override toll restriction of another extension by using the

Walking COS feature.

Flow Chart of TRS Override

TRS Override by Account Codes is attempted.

Verify - All Option/Forced

No

Yes

What is the account code mode?

Verify - Toll

Does the entered code match a stored account code?

Yes

Is the COS number 1?

No

The call is made with the COS number 2.

Does the entered code match a stored account code?

Yes No

The Toll Restriction COS number remains the same as the extension being used.

The call is not allowed.

A reorder tone is returned to the user.

Features 3-133

T

3 Features




Operator/Manager Service Features RRRR User Manual




Account Code Entry


Toll Restriction

Walking COS



— User Manual

Toll Restriction Override — Toll Restriction Override by Account Codes

3-134 Features

3 Features

T

T

oll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class

Description

Allows assigning a toll restriction class when the Electronic Station

Lockout or Remote Station Lock feature is set.

An extension user usually cannot make an outside call at a locked extension, however if a toll restriction class is assigned in program

[312], the user can make an outside call at the locked extension.

Condition

• The higher toll restriction COS number will take precedence.

For example, if toll restriction COS number 4 is assigned to an extension and the station lock boundary class is 3, the extension user is allowed to make a call with toll restriction COS 4.








Toll Restriction


Not applicable.

Features 3-135

V

3 Features

V

oice Mail Integration for KX-TVS50

Description

When a Panasonic Voice Processing System (KX-TVS50) is connected to the system, they communicate in a tightly integrated fashion (APT Integration). For example, the system sends the Voice

Processing System (VPS) data which contains extension number configuration information and then the VPS automatically creates mailboxes with this data (Auto Configuration — Quick setup).

The system informs a VPS of the state of a call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.) through APT Integration. The System also informs a VPS through APT Integration of the destination of a call transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or DISA

Intercept Routing — No Answer feature. This APT Integration is established automatically when a VPS is connected to the system.

System Explanation

1. Voice Mail Service

1.1 Call Forwarding to VM

If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose destination is the VPS, an incoming call will be forwarded to the

VPS. The system will send the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave his/her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number.

Intercom

Call

Outside Call

DIL, DISA

System

Extension

C.FWD

KX-TVS50

Port 1

VM Hunting Chain

Port 2

Outside Call

DIL, DISA

System

Operator

Transfer

Extension

C.FWD

KX-TVS50

Port 1

VM Hunting Chain

Port 2

3-136 Features

3 Features

V

1.2 DISA Intercept to VM

If the VPS is set as the Intercept destination of an outside (CO) line, an outside call will be forwarded to the VPS. The system will send the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time.

Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number. Delayed Ringing must be assigned to voice mail extensions.

Outside Call

DISA

System

Extension

Intercept

KX-TVS50

Port 1

Port 2

1.3 Special Features for a Proprietary Telephone through

APT Integration

The following features are available only with a proprietary telephone in APT Integration.


Voice Mail Transfer

With these features, a proprietary telephone user can monitor incoming messages being recorded into his/her mailbox or easily transfer an outside calls to a desired extension mailbox.

1.4 Listening to a Recorded Message

If the VPS receives a message or records a conversation, the

VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator on the corresponding proprietary telephone to notify the user. The

VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in their mailbox. When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message. A single line telephone user hears dial tone 3 when going off-hook if there are messages in their mailbox.

They can call the voice mail extension to listen to their messages. In this case, they must listen to all of the messages.

Once they access voice mail, dial tone 3 will be eliminated and not be heard next time they go off-hook. Therefore, they will not know even if there are messages left.

Features 3-137

V

3-138 Features

3 Features

2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service

2.1 AA to Extension

AA receives and answers outside calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signaling, which is sent from the calling party.

Outside Call

DIL

System

Extension

Transfer

KX-TVS50

AA 1

AA Hunting Chain

AA 2

2.2 Extension Backup

If the voice mail extensions are assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator extension, for the same outside (CO) line, voice mail extensions can be used as backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming outside call. Delayed Ringing must be assigned to voice mail extensions.

Outside Call

Normal

System

Immediately

10 s delay

15 s delay

Extension

KX-TVS50

AA 1

AA 2

3 Features

Conditions

V

• A maximum of two VPSs can be connected to the system.

Extension group 7

KX-TVS50 (VPS1)

7

8

KX-TA624

KX-TVS50 (VPS2)

15

Port 1

Port 2

Port 1

16 Port 2

Extension group 8

• A maximum of four extension jacks (07, 08, 15 and 16) of the system can be connected to VPSs with four-conductor wire. Extension jack number 07, or jack numbers 07 and 08 can be the voice mail APT ports for VPS1 in program [130]. Extension jack number 15, or jack numbers

15 and 16 can be for VPS2 in program [131].

• When “Port 7 & 8” is selected in program [130], extension jack numbers 07 and 08 will be in extension group 7 automatically.

Likewise, when “Port 15 & 16” is selected in program [131], extension jack numbers 15 and 16 will be in extension group 8 automatically. Also the Station Hunting type is set as “Circular”, and the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain are enabled automatically in each of these two extension groups.

• The lowest jack number (07 or 15) of each extension group must be connected to the Port 1 of a VPS. The VPS data is transmitted to the

VPS via the Port 1.

• One connection between the system and a VPS, for example extension jack number 07 of the system and Port 1 of the VPS, creates one Voice

Mail extension and can only answer one call. Therefore, if one VPS is connected to the system, maximum of two calls can be answered simultaneously.

• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features.


Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer

DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer

For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS (Follow On ID feature). If a DISA call is transferred to the

VPS by Intercept Routing from a ring group, the system will transmit the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions.

• The mailbox number is the same as its extension number.

• Data Line Security is set automatically on the Voice Mail extension.

Features 3-139

V

3 Features









[130] Voice Mail 1 APT Port for KX-TVS50









Button






Intercept Routing


Station Hunting



— User Manual



Voice Mail Transfer

3-140 Features

3 Features

V

V

oice Mail Integration for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Description

This system supports Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment

(Panasonic KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100) by sending DTMF tones described in program [103]. The DTMF tones sent to a VPS indicate the state of a call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.). The DTMF tones also inform a VPS of the destination of a call transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or DISA

Intercept Routing — No Answer feature. Up to four VPSs can be connected to the extension jacks as extensions in the system.

System Explanation

1. Voice Mail Service

1.1 Call Forwarding to VM

If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose destination is the VPS, an incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS. The system will send the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave his/her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number.

Intercom

Call

Outside Call

DIL, DISA

System

Extension

C.FWD

KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Port 1 Port 2

VM Hunting

Chain

Port 4 Port 3

Outside Call

DIL, DISA

System

Operator

Transfer

Extension

C.FWD

KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Port 1 Port 2

VM Hunting

Chain

Port 4 Port 3

Features 3-141

V

3-142 Features

3 Features

1.2 DISA Intercept to VM

If the VPS is set as the Intercept destination of an outside (CO) line, an outside call will be forwarded to the VPS. The system will send the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time.

Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number. Delayed Ringing must be assigned to voice mail extensions.

Outside Call

DISA

System

Extension

Intercept

KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

1.3 Listening to a Recorded Message

If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the

MESSAGE button indicator on the corresponding proprietary telephone to notify the user. The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in their mailbox. When the

MESSAGE button indicator is lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message. A single line telephone user hears dial tone 3 when going off-hook if there are messages in their mailbox. They can call the voice mail extension to listen to their messages. In this case, they must listen to all of the messages. Once they access voice mail, dial tone 3 will be eliminated and not be heard next time they go off-hook. Therefore, they will not know even if there are messages left.

3 Features

V

2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service

2.1 AA to Extension

AA receives and answers outside calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signaling, which is sent from the calling party.

Outside Call

DIL

System

Extension

Transfer

AA 1

KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

AA 2

AA Hunting

Chain

AA 4 AA 3

2.2 Extension Backup

If the voice mail extensions are assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator extension, for the same outside (CO) line, voice mail extensions can be used as backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming outside call. Up to two voice mail extensions are available as backup. Delayed Ringing must be assigned to voice mail extensions.

Outside Call

Normal

System

Immediately

10 s delay

15 s delay

Extension

KX-TVS75/100

AA 1

AA 2

Features 3-143

V

3 Features

Conditions

• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features.



DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer

For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS (Follow On ID feature). If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by Intercept Routing from a ring group, the system will transmit the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions.

• The mailbox number is the same as its extension number.

• The Voice Mail extension should set Data Line Security to achieve proper recording.

• If KX-TA624 cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the

KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100, select “KX-T1232”. Follow the steps for a

KX-T1232.

• Enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain as follows.

1) Assign all Voice Mail extensions to one extension group in program

[600].

2) Assign “Enable” to the group in program [100].

3) Assign the hunting type to the group in program [101].









[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100








Button






Intercept Routing

Station Hunting



— User Manual


3-144 Features

3 Features

V

V

olume Control – Handset Receiver/Headset/Ringer/Speaker

Description

Allows a proprietary telephone user to change the following as desired.

Handset receiver volume

Headset volume

Ringer volume

Speaker volume

Condition

• The procedure is as follows.

Slide the following levers located on the left side of the telephone.

Volume Control (MIN – MAX)

Handset (Headset) Volume Selector (NORMAL – HIGH)

Ringer Volume Selector (OFF / LOW / HIGH)




None


Configuration

— User Manual

Initial Settings — Volume Control – Handset Receiver/Headset/

Ringer/Speaker

Features 3-145

W

3 Features

W

alking COS

Description

Allows a user who is not at their own telephone to override the toll restriction COS number of another extension. At the other extension, the user dials their extension password. For the duration of the call, the COS of the extension is changed to the COS of their own extension.

Conditions

• When a user makes a call using this feature, the user’s extension number will be displayed on the SMDR, not the extension where the user made the call.

• If the extension overriding toll restriction is assigned to the Account

Code — Forced or Verify - All mode, the user must enter the account code before the line access code.



RRR User Manual







— User Manual

Walking COS

3-146 Features

Section 4

System Programming

This section provides step-by-step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone.

4.1

General Programming Instructions

Default Setting

This system has factory default settings. If any of the programming needs to be changed, the necessary information will be found in

Section 3, “Features”. This makes the system very simple to install and customize as required by the customer. Any required changes can be written in the “Programming Tables”.

Required Telephone Set

One of the following telephone sets is required for system programming.

• Proprietary Telephone (PT): KX-T7130, KX-T7030

Extensions Used for Programming

Only the manager extension can perform system programming. The extension user connected to Jack number 01 is the manager extension.

4-2 System Programming

4.1.1

Using Proprietary Telephones

Using the Overlay

A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory.

This overlay should be used at all times during programming. The features of the telephone keys change during programming as follows. (The original features are in parentheses.)

During Normal Operation

(PAUSE)

(SP-PHONE)

(REDIAL)

(AUTO ANSWER/MUTE)

(FLASH)

(TRANSFER)

(FWD/DND)

(CONF)

(INTERCOM )

(AUTO DIAL/STORE)

(HOLD)

(SAVE)

During Programming

PAUSE

NEXT

PREV (PREVIOUS)

SELECT

FLASH

CLEAR

, – (KX-T7030) / (KX-T7130)

SECRET

STORE

END

, – (KX-T7130 only)

Location of Controls with the Overlay

The pictures below show the features of the buttons of the

KX-T7030 and KX-T7130 during programming.

SECRET

, –

PREV FLASH END

CLEAR

PAUSE

STORE

AUTO

SELECT

NEXT

KX-T7030

SECRET

, –

PREV FLASH END

CLEAR

PAUSE

STORE

AUTO

SELECT

NEXT

KX-T7130

System Programming 4-3

4.1.1

Using Proprietary Telephones

Viewing the Display

The display gives the user helpful information, such as the next step, previous entries, etc.

The KX-T7130 and the KX-T7030 both utilize one information line for programming.

The display capacity is 16 digits. If the entry is longer than

16 digits, the user can shift the display by pressing the or button.

Before entering the programming mode

Before entering the programming mode, confirm that:

• The telephone is on-hook.

• No calls are on hold at your telephone.

Entering the programming mode

1. Set the MEMORY switch on the telephone to

“PROGRAM”.

The display shows:

PITS-PGM NO?

→

2. Dial #.

The display shows:

Password :

3. Enter the system password (default 1234).

The display shows the initial system programming message:

SYS-PGM NO?

→

Note

• The entered system password is not shown on the display. The system password can be changed by system programming. Refer to Section 4.2

[002] “System Password”.

• During the programming mode, the extension is treated as a busy extension.


4.1.2

Programming Methods

Advancing to the next stage

When “

SYS-PGM NO?

→

” is displayed, the user can go to the desired program by entering the 3-digit program address.

Storing your data

Press STORE to store the data.

• The STORE indicator lights red and a confirmation tone is heard.

* Confirmation tone (one beep)

After pressing STORE, a beep will be heard. This informs the user that storing is completed.

* Confirmation tone (two beeps)

This informs the user that the same parameter has already been stored.

* Alarm tone (three beeps)

If this alarm is heard, the user’s entry is not valid.

Making another selection within the same program address

• To make the next selection, press NEXT.

• To make the previous selection, press PREV.

• To make a specific selection, press SELECT and then enter the number.

Confirming the entries

The user may review the stored programming without making any changes.

Going to another program address

Press END and the initial system programming message will be displayed.

The display shows:

PITS-PGM NO?

→

Then enter a program address.

You can go to the higher number program address by pressing the button and the lower number by pressing the button while the program title is displayed.

Display example:

Date/Time Set program title

Returning to the operation mode

Set the MEMORY switch to “SET”.


4.1.3

Entering Characters

The user can enter characters to store names for extension numbers by using the dialing key pad and the buttons.

Each of the twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad has seven characters assigned. See the Combination Table below.

Press SELECT

(Number of times)

Keys

1

4

5

2

3

8

9

6

7

0

0

#

1 2 3

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

0

*

8

9

#

G

J

M

P

Q

A

D

T

W

”

$ t w m p j g q a d

+

.

%

Combination Table

N

R

H

K

Z

B

E

,

–

U

X

&

4

n r h k z b e

’

= u x

@

5

Note

The alphabetical characters correspond to the letters shown on the twelve dialing keys on a proprietary telephone (except for Q, q, Z, z and all other symbols).

6

O

S

I

L

!

C

F

:

<

V

Y

( o s l i

?

c f

;

> v y

)

The following example shows how to select a desired character.

For example, to select the letter “M”:

1. Press 6. (“M” is stored in key “6”.)

2. Press the SELECT button once.

• Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times enters the desired letter. Pressing SELECT twice enters the letter “m”, pressing three times enters “N”, and so on.


4.1.3

Entering Characters

Example of entering characters: to enter “Mike”:

The display shows:

1. Enter 6.

2. Press SELECT.

3. Enter 4.

4. Press SELECT six times.

6

M

M4

Mi

5. Enter 5.

6. Press SELECT four times.

7. Enter 3.

8. Press SELECT four times.

Mi5

Mik

Mik3

Mike

Note

• To erase all the letters, press CLEAR.

• To erase the last letter, press .


4.1.4

Programming Example

The following programming instructions assume that the user has already entered the programming mode.

Example: Program [001] “System Speed Dialing Entry”

Sample of Description Explanation

001

(1)

4.2


System Speed Dialing Entry

(3)

(2)

Description (4)

Used to program the System Speed

Dialing numbers. These numbers are available to all extension users. There are 100 numbers available from 00 to 99.

Selection (5)

• Speed dialing number: 00 – 99

• Telephone number: 32 digits (max.)

Default (6)

All speed dialing numbers – Not stored

Programming (7)

1. Enter 001.

(8)

Display: Speed Dialing

(9)

2. Press NEXT.

(10)

Display: Speed NO?

→

(11)

3. Enter a speed dialing number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter speed dialing number 00.

Display example:

00:Not Stored

(12)

4. Enter a telephone number.

(13)

To delete the current entry, press

CLEAR.

(14)

To change the current entry, press

CLEAR and enter the new number.

5. Press STORE.

(15)

6. To program another speed dialing number, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and enter the desired speed dialing number.

(16)

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6.

(17)

8. Press END.

(18)

Conditions (19)

• Each speed dialing number has a maximum of 32 digits. The valid characters are 0 – 9,

, and # keys,

and the FLASH, PAUSE, SECRET

and – (hyphen) buttons.

•

•

•

•

•

Feature Reference (20)



(1) Program address: This address is printed at the top of every page to quickly find the desired program.

(2) Mode title.

(3) Program title.

(4) Provides a more detailed description of the program.

(5) Shows the user the assignable choices.

(6) Shows the user the factory default setting.

(7) Shows the user programming procedures step by step.

• During programming, use the overlay.

• Before starting to program, enter the programming mode. (See “Entering the programming mode” on page 4-4.)

(8) Enter the program address.

(9) The display shows the program title.

(10) Press NEXT shown on the overlay.

(11) The display asks the user to enter a speed dialing number.

(12) If the telephone number has already been stored, the number is displayed.

(13) Enter the telephone number that the user wants to store.

The entry will be displayed as the user enters the digits.

(14) Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry.

(15) The entry is now stored.

The indicator lights red and a confirmation tone lets the user know that storing is completed.

(16) Select the best way for the user to store another speed dialing number. Pressing NEXT/PREV allows the user to select the next higher/lower speed dialing number.

The user can also continue pressing a button until the desired entry is displayed. If the user presses SELECT and the desired speed dialing number, the selected code will be displayed.

(17) The user can continue programming another entry.

(18) After all the entries have been stored, complete this program by pressing END. After pressing END, the user can go to any desired program address. The user can return to the initial system programming message mode at any time by pressing END.

(19) Tells the user what should be noted or considered when doing the program.

(20) Lists all of the features related to the program. These features are described in Section 3.


4.2


Date and Time Setting

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

000

Sets the current date and time.

• Year: 00 – 99

• Month: Jan. – Dec.

• Day: 1 – 31

• Day of the week: Sun / Mon / Tue / Wed / Thu / Fri / Sat

• Hour: 1 – 12

• Minute: 00 – 59

• AM / PM

98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM

1.

Enter 000.

Display: Date/Time Set

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: ’98 Jan. 1 Thu

3.

Enter the year.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new year.

4.

Press .

5.

Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed.

6.

Press .

7.

Enter the day.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new day.

8.

Press .

9.

Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed.

10.

Press .

Display example: 12:00 AM

11.

Enter the hour.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new hour.

12.

Press .


000

Conditions


4.2


Date and Time Setting

(contd.)

13.

Enter the minute.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new minute.

14.

Press .

15.

Press

16.

Press .

17.

Press

18.

Press END.

• After changing an entry, the user can press STORE. It is not necessary to perform the rest of the steps.

• To return to a previous field, press in steps 4 through 16.

• If an alarm is heard after pressing STORE, check if the date is valid or not.

• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.

• The operator and manager can set the date and time in the station programming mode.

• The system supports the years from 1998 to 2097. Setting 2098 and

2099 are not available.


Display, in Idle


4.2



Description

Selection

Default

Programming

001

Used to program the System Speed Dialing numbers. These numbers are available to all extension users. There are 100 numbers available from 00 to 99.

• Speed dialing number: 00 – 99

• Telephone number: 32 digits (max.)

All speed dialing numbers – Not stored

1.

Enter 001.

Display: Speed Dialing

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Speed NO?

→

3.

Enter a speed dialing number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter speed dialing number 00.

Display example: 00:Not Stored

4.

Enter a telephone number.

To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new number.

5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another speed dialing number, press NEXT or

PREV, or SELECT and enter the desired speed dialing number.

7.

Repeat steps 4 through 6.

8.

Press END.


001

Conditions


4.2



(contd.)

• Each speed dialing number has a maximum of 32 digits. The valid characters are 0 – 9, , and # keys, and the FLASH, PAUSE,

SECRET and – (hyphen) buttons.

– To store a flash signal, press FLASH.

Note: The stored flash will only be effective during a call in progress. (Refer to Section 3 “External Feature

Access”.)

– To store a hyphen, press the “–” button.

– To store a pause, press PAUSE.

(Refer to Section 3 “Pause Insertion, Automatic”.)

– To store a feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF signals, press the and # keys.

(Refer to Section 3 “Pulse to Tone Conversion”.)

– To prevent displaying all or part of a number, press INTERCOM before and after the confidential parts of the number. (Refer to

Section 3 “Secret Dialing”.)

• When storing an external number, include a line access code (9, 81 – 86) before the number. When dialing, a pause will automatically be inserted after the code.

• When storing an account code, enter the account code after the line access code. Press and then enter the account code.

(Refer to Section 3 “Account Code Entry”.)

• It is possible to store a number consisting of 33 digits or more by storing it in two speed dialing numbers. The line access code should be stored in the first speed dialing number.

• To access another speed dialing number in steps 3 through 6, press

SELECT and start with step 3.

• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display, press or .




4.2


System Password

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Assigns the password required for entering the system programming mode or assigning extension passwords.

Password: 0000 – 9999

1234

1.

Enter 002.

Display: System Password

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Password : 1234

3.

Enter a password.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new password.

4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


System Programming with a Proprietary Telephone

002


003

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


DSS Console Port Assignment

Assigns the jack numbers for the DSS Consoles.

• DSS Console number: 1 or 2

• Jack number: 02 – 24 / Disable

All DSS Consoles — Disable

1.

Enter 003.

Display: DSS Jack Assign

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: DSS NO?

→

3.

Enter a DSS Console number (1 or 2).

Pressing NEXT also can enter DSS Console number 1.

Display example: DSS1:Disable

4.

Enter a jack number.

To assign no DSS Console jack, press CLEAR.


To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new jack number.

5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program the other DSS Console, press NEXT or PREV.

7.

Repeat steps 4 and 5.

8.

Press END.

• Both DSS Consoles cannot be assigned to the same DSS Console jack.

• If a single line telephone is assigned as the paired extension, the paired

DSS Console will not function.

• Jack 01 is the manager extension, so the jack 01 cannot be assigned as the DSS Console jack.

• Jack numbers assigned as the DSS Console jacks in this program cannot be assigned in program [004] “Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS

Console”.




4.2


Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console

004

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Assigns the jack numbers for the paired extensions with DSS

Consoles.

• DSS Console number: 1 or 2

• Jack number: 01 – 24 / Disable

DSS1 – Disable, DSS2 – Disable

1.

Enter 004.

Display: DSS Pair Assign

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: DSS NO?

→

3.

Enter a DSS Console number (1 or 2).

Pressing NEXT also can enter DSS Console number 1.

Display example: DSS1:Disable

4.


To assign no DSS Console jack, press CLEAR.



5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program the other DSS Console, press NEXT or PREV.

7.


8.

Press END.

• Both telephones cannot be assigned to the same jack.

• If a single line telephone is assigned as the paired extension, the paired

DSS Console will not function.

• Jack numbers assigned as the paired extensions in this program cannot be assigned in program [003] “DSS Console Port Assignment”.




005

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button

Condition


Enables or disables automatically holding an outside call when a

DSS button on a DSS Console or proprietary telephone is pressed.

Through this assignment, the button can perform the following.

• With Transfer — Pressing a DSS button holds an outside call and quickly transfers it to an extension without pressing the TRANSFER button.

• Without Transfer — Pressing the TRANSFER button and then a

DSS button will transfer an outside call.

With Transfer / Without Transfer

With Transfer

1.

Enter 005.

Display: DSS Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: With Transfer

3.

Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.

4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• This assignment applies to all DSS buttons on all DSS Consoles and proprietary telephones in the system.




4.2


Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode

006

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


This program is used to determine if the day/night/lunch mode is set automatically or manually.

Man (manual) / Auto (automatic)

Manual

1.

Enter 006.

Display: Day/Night Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Mode Change:Man

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• If automatic is assigned, the day/night/lunch mode is changed at the time programmed in [007] “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start

Time”. However, if feature number “783#” is entered and the mode is changed to “lunch”, the mode will not be changed at the programmed time until feature number “780#” is entered.

• The operator and manager can change the day/night/lunch mode at any time.




007

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time

When automatic is programmed in program [006] “Time

(Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode”, this program sets the starting time on a day of the week basis.

• Day of the week selection:

Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday /

Friday / Saturday /

(every day of the week)

• Mode: Day / Night / Lunch-S (lunch starting time) /

Lunch-E (lunch ending time)

• Hour: 1 – 12 / None (no change)

• Minute: 0 – 59

• AM / PM

Every day of the week — Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:00 PM /

Lunch-S – None / Lunch-E – None

1.

Enter 007.

Display: Day/Night Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Day of The Week

3.

Press NEXT or PREV until the desired day of the week is displayed.

To assign every day of the week, press instead of NEXT or PREV.

Display example: Sunday

4.

Press SELECT.

Display example: Day : 9:00AM

To select another mode, keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.

5.

Press .

6.

Enter the hour.

To set no change, keep pressing SELECT until “None” is displayed and go to step 11.

If SELECT is pressed, the display shows the previous entry. If the previous setting was “None”, press SELECT to enter the starting time.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new time.

7.

Press .


4.2


Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time

(contd.)

007

Conditions


8.

Enter the minute.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new minutes.

9.

Press .

10.

Press

11.

Press STORE.

12.

To program another time service mode, press SELECT.

13.


14.

To program another day of the week, press NEXT or PREV.

15.


16.

Press END.

• If it is not necessary to change the time service, select “None” in step 6.

• To select the desired day, the user can also keep pressing NEXT in step

3. To assign every day of the week to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

Every day.

• The day or night mode is interrupted during the lunch mode. After the lunch mode is finished, the day or night mode will start again.




008

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Operator Assignment

Assigns the jack number for the operator. The operator has the ability to perform operator services.

Jack number: 01 – 24 / Disable (no operator)

Jack-01

1.

Enter 008.

Display: Operator Ext

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: OPT :Jack-01

3.


To assign no operator, press CLEAR.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


Operator


4.2


Extension Number Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


009

Assigns an extension number to each extension.

• Jack number: 01 – 24

• Extension Number: 100 – 199

Jack 01 – 24 = Ext 101 – 124

1.

Enter 009.

Display: Extension No Set

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.


Pressing NEXT also can enter jack number 01.

Display: Jack01:Ext101

4.

Enter an extension number.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and enter the desired jack number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• Program [604] “Extension Name Setting” is used to name the extensions.

• An extension number which has been assigned to one jack cannot be used for another jack. If an assigned number is entered, an alarm tone will be heard and the entry is invalid.


Display, Call Information

Intercom Calling


010

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


LCD Time Display Selection

Selects how the current time and date will be displayed on a proprietary telephone while it is idle. Either 12 hour or 24 hour

(military time) is available.

12 HOUR / 24 HOUR

12 HOUR

1.

Enter 010.

Display: Time Display

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: 12 HOUR

3.

Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.

4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• Programs [000] “Date and Time Setting” and [007] “Time (Day/Night/

Lunch) Service Start Time”, and the Timed Reminder feature are assigned using 12-hour time regardless of this program. The SMDR printout is also printed using 12-hour time.


Display, in Idle


4.2


Hunting Group Set

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


100

Assigns to enable or disable the station hunting feature for each extension group.

• Extension group number: 1 – 8, ( = all extension groups)

• Disable / Enable

All extension groups — Disable

1.

Enter 100.

Display: Hunting Group

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Group NO?

→

3.

Enter an extension group number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter extension group number 1.

Display example: Group1:Disable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another extension group, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and enter the desired extension group number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• Program [600] “Extension Group Assignment” is used to assign the extension group members.

• To assign all extension groups, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

Group :

.


Station Hunting


101

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Station Hunting Type

Used to set the Station Hunting type for each extension group.

There are two Station Hunting types available: Circular and

Terminating. If circular is assigned for a group, all of the extensions in the group are searched one time until an idle one is found. If terminating is assigned, searching stops at the extension which has the highest jack number in the group.

• Extension group number: 1 – 8, ( = all extension groups)

• Terminate (terminating) / Circular

All extension groups – Terminate

1.

Enter 101.

Display: Hunting Type

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Group NO?

→

3.

Enter an extension group number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter extension group number 1.

Display example: Group1:Terminate

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another extension group, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and enter the desired extension group number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• Program [600] “Extension Group Assignment” is used to assign the extension group members.

• If all extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard.


Station Hunting


4.2


Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


102

Enables or disables the jacks which work as the voice mail ports for

DTMF transmission to the Panasonic Voice Processing System

(KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100).

• Jack number: 07 / 08 / 15 / 16, ( = all jacks)

• Enable / Disable

All jacks — Disable

1.

Enter 102.

Display: VM Port

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display example: #07:Disable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another jack number, press NEXT or PREV, or


7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all jacks to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

# :Mixed

.




103

4.2


DTMF Integration for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Enables or disables the system to send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the status of a call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.) in addition to the normal call progress tones. These codes enable the Panasonic Voice Processing System

(KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100) to immediately recognize the current status of the call and speed up the call handling.

Enable / Disable

Disable

1.

Enter 103.

Display example: DTMF Integration

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Disable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The table on the next page describes the codes (DTMF tones), call state and conditions for the DTMF integration operation.

• Extensions which are not assigned as the voice mail ports will not receive the DTMF tones.

• In order to select “Enable” in this program, programs [130] “Voice Mail 1

APT Port for KX-TVS50” and [131] “Voice Mail 2 APT Port for

KX-TVS50” should first be set to “Disable”.

• This feature improves the performance of the Panasonic KX-TVS75/

KX-TVS100 which have been programmed for Inband Signaling. Please refer to the Voice Processing System manual for details on programming

Inband Signaling.




4.2


DTMF Integration

(contd.)

103

Code

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

#9

Call State

Ringback Tone

Busy Tone

Reorder Tone

DND

Answer

Conditions

When an extension the Voice Processing System has dialed is ringing.

When an extension the Voice Processing System has dialed is busy.

When the Voice Processing System has dialed an invalid extension number or the Voice Processing

System is inadvertently connected to another Voice

Mail Port.

When an extension the Voice Processing System has dialed sets the DND (Do Not Disturb) feature.

When an extension the Voice Processing System has dialed answers the call.

Forwarded to

Voice Processing

System (Ringing)

When a called extension is forwarded to a Voice

Processing System, the call can be forwarded to another available Voice Processing System. In this way, the first Voice Processing System, typically an

Auto-Attendant, can release the call to the other Voice

Processing System and receive another incoming call.

Forwarded to

Voice Mail (Busy)

Forwarded to

Extension

When a called extension is forwarded to a Voice

Processing System, a Voice Processing System is not available to receive the call.

When a called extension is forwarded to another, non-

Voice Processing System extension.

Confirmation Tone When a Voice Processing System has successfully turned a message waiting lamp on or off.

Disconnect When the calling party is disconnected.


104

4.2


Hold Mode Selection

Description

Assigns the call hold mode for single line telephones.

Each mode is explained as follows.

Hold Mode

Hold-1

To hold

Flash the hookswitch + on-hook

Operation

To transfer

Flash the hookswitch

+ extension number or line access code

Hold-2

Hold-3


+ feature number (20) + on-hook


+ feature number (20) + on-hook




+ feature number (20)


Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Hold-1 / Hold-2 / Hold-3

Hold-1

1.

Enter 104.

Display: Hold Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Hold-1

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None





4.2


Conference Tone

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


105

Assigns whether or not a confirmation tone is sent before starting and ending a conference call. This assignment also works for the

Executive Busy Override feature.


Enable

1.

Enter 105.

Display: Conference Tone

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Enable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


Conference


106

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


External Paging Access Tone

Used to remove the confirmation tone for the external pager. The default setting sends confirmation tone to the external pager before paging is sent.


Enable

1.

Enter 106.

Display: Ext-Pag Ack-Tone

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Page:Enable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The external pager is a user-supplied item. One external pager can be installed to the system.


Confirmation Tones

Paging — All

Paging — External


4.2


DTMF Receiver Check

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


107

Enables or disables the DTMF receiver to check whether the DTMF receivers are activated normally or not.

Six DTMF receivers work with the following cards.

DTMF-R 1 and 2 — basic extension card (jacks 01 – 08)

DTMF-R 3 and 4 — extension expansion card 1

(jacks 09 – 16)

DTMF-R 5 and 6 — extension expansion card 2 (jacks 17 – 24)

• DTMF Receiver number: 1 – 6


All DTMF receivers — Enable

1.

Enter 107.

Display: DTMF-R Selection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display:DTMF-R NO?

→

3.

Enter the DTMF receiver number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter DTMF receiver number 1.

Display example:DTMF-R1:Enable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another DTMF receiver, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and enter the desired DTMF receiver number.

7.


8.

Press END.

None

None


108

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


Flash Mode for a Station Locked Extension

Conditions


Assigns whether or not an extension where the electronic station lockout or remote station lock control feature has been set, can send a flash signal during a conversation with an external party.


Disable

1.

Enter 108.

Display: Locked Ext Flash

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: FLASH:Disable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None





4.2


CO Indicator Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


109

Assigns whether or not an extension user can answer an incoming outside call when they were was not assigned to receive calls in programs “[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/

Night/Lunch”.

Enable

(A CO button indicator will flash when a call is received.

An extension user can answer the call by pressing the flashing button.)

Disable (A CO button indicator lights when a call is received, but an extension user cannot answer the call.)

Enable

1.

Enter 109.

Display: CO Indicator

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example:Enable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None

None


110

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Flash Key Mode

Assigns sending a flash signal when the FLASH button on a proprietary telephone is pressed.

MODE 1 (A flash signal is sent during the time programmed in program “[418] Flash Time”)

MODE 2 (A flash signal is sent while the FLASH button is pressed.)

MODE 2

1.

Enter 110.

Display: Flash Key

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example:MODE 1

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• For MODE 2, a flash signal will be sent for the programmed time in program [418] if the FLASH button is pressed for less than the programmed time.



Flash


4.2


Hold Music Selection

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions

111

Used to determine the music source use for Music on Hold for outside calls.

External / Tone

External

1.

Enter 111.

Display: Hold Music

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example:External

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The external music source is a user-supplied item. One music source can be installed.

• If “Tone” is assigned, the following cyclic tone is sent to the held outside (CO) line.

1 s



Music on Hold


112

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


DSS Console Indication Mode

Enables or disables the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) on DSS buttons to indicate the Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND) status of corresponding extensions.

Enable (FWD/DND — flashing) / Disable (FWD/DND — off)

Enable

1.

Enter 112.

Display: DSS Indication

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example:Enable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None




4.2


Extension Ringing Pattern Selection

Description

Selects the extension ringing pattern when an intercom call is received.

The ringing patterns are shown below.

1 s

115

Single:

Double:

Triple:

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Single / Double / Triple

Double

1.

Enter 115.

Display: Ext Ring pattern

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Double

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The extension ringback tone is the same as the pattern assigned in this program.

• The programs [423] “Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection” and

[706] “Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection” should be considered when assigning this program.




117

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Call Pickup Tone

Enables or disables the confirmation tone sent when the Call pickup feature is activated.


Enable

1.

Enter 117.

Display: Call Pickup Tone

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None



Call Pickup, Group


4.2


Pulse Restriction

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


118

Enables or disables sending pulse dialing to the Central Office during a conversation with an external party, when Pulse or Call block is selected in program [401] “Dial Mode”.


Enable

1.

Enter 118.

Display: Pulse Restrict

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None

None


119

Description

4.2


Redialing After Pulse to Tone Conversion

Enables or disables sending tone dialing to the Central Office when an extension user redials after changing from pulse to tone mode by

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions



Disable

1.

Enter 119.

Display: Redial After #

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None




4.2


Toll Restriction Check for and #

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


125

Assigns whether the entered “ ” and “#” are checked by toll restriction or not. This assignment is required for certain Central

Offices to prevent toll fraud. Some Central Offices ignore the user-dialed “ ” and “#”. If the user’s Central Office ignores these symbols, select “Disable”.

Enable (check) / Disable (does not check)

Enable

1.

Enter 125.

Display: TRS Check for #

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


Toll Restriction


130

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition

4.2


Voice Mail 1 APT Port for KX-TVS50 †


Enables or disables the extension jack numbers 07, or 07 and 08 corresponding to the voice mail APT ports for data transmission to the Panasonic Voice Processing System (KX-TVS50).

• Port 7 / Port 7 & 8 / Disable


1.

Enter 130.

Display: VM1(APT)Port

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Port:Disable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• To change the current assignment from “Port 7” to “Port 7 & 8”, first it must be changed to “Disable”. Likewise, to change it from “Port 7 & 8” to “Port 7”, first it must be changed to “Disable”. If the current assignment is already “Disable”, making a change can be done in one step.

• When “Port 7 & 8” is selected in this program, following programs are automatically set as described below.

[600] Extension Group Assignment: extension jack number 07 — extension group 7 extension jack number 08 — extension group 7

[100] Hunting Group Set: extension group 7 — Enable

[101] Station Hunting Type: extension group 7 — Circular

[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100: extension jack number 07 — Enable extension jack number 08 — Enable

• If “Enable” is assigned in program [103] “DTMF Integration for

KX-TVS75/TVS100”, “Port 7” or “Port 7 & 8” cannot be selected.

• The extension jacks assigned as the voice mail APT ports in this program are automatically set the Data Line Security.





4.2


Voice Mail 2 APT Port for KX-TVS50 †

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


131

Enables or disables the extension jack numbers 15, or 15 and 16 corresponding to the voice mail APT ports for data transmission to the Panasonic Voice Processing System (KX-TVS50).

• Port 15 / Port 15 & 16 / Disable


1.

Enter 131.

Display: VM2(APT)Port

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Port:Disable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• To change the current assignment from “Port 15” to “Port 15 & 16”, first it must be changed to “Disable”. Likewise, to change it from “Port 15 &

16” to “Port 15”, first it must be changed to “Disable”. If the current assignment is already “Disable”, making a change can be done in one step.

• When “Port 15 & 16” is selected in this program, following programs are automatically set as described below.

[600] Extension Group Assignment: extension jack number 15 — extension group 8 extension jack number 16 — extension group 8

[100] Hunting Group Set: extension group 8 — Enable

[101] Station Hunting Type: extension group 8 — Circular

[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100: extension jack number 15 — Enable extension jack number 16 — Enable

• If “Enable” is assigned in program [103] “DTMF Integration for

KX-TVS75/TVS100”, “Port 15” or “Port 15 & 16” cannot be selected.

• The extension jacks assigned as the voice mail APT ports in this program are automatically set the Data Line Security.





200

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Hold Recall Time

Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time.

Time: 30 sec / 1 min / 1.5 min / 2 min / 3 min / 4 min / 5 min /

6 min / Disable (= Hold Recall disabled) (seconds/minutes)

30 sec

1.

Enter 200.

Display: Hold Recall Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time:30 sec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• When “Disable” is selected, the hold alarm is also disabled.




4.2


Transfer Recall Time

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


201

Assigns the length of the transfer recall timer. If a transferred call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be returned to the original caller.

Time: 15 sec / 30 sec / 1 min / 2 min (seconds/minutes)

30 sec

1.

Enter 201.

Display: Transfer Recall

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


Call Transfer, Unscreened — to Extension


202

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Call Forwarding Start Time

Sets the time for the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature. If a call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be forwarded to the destination.

5 sec delay / 10 sec delay / 15 sec delay / 20 sec delay (seconds)

15 sec delay

1.

Enter 202.

Display: Call FWD Delay

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: 15sec delay

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None




4.2


Pickup Dial Delay Time

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


203

Sets the length of time for the Pickup Dialing feature. If the telephone user lifts the handset, the programmed party will be called when the time expires. This delay gives the user an opportunity to enter numbers before automatic dialing occurs.

1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 4 sec (seconds)

3 sec

1.

Enter 203.

Display: Pickup Dial Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: PUD Time:3sec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


Pickup Dialing


204

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Call Duration Count Start Time

Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.

When the system has sent all the digits to the central office and this timer expires, the system will start counting the call. A display telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.

Instantly / 5 s / 10 s / 15 s / 20 s / 25 s / 30 s / 35 s / 40 s / 45 s /

50 s after dial (seconds)

10 s after dial

1.

Enter 204.

Display: Durat-Time Count

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: 5s after dial

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialed. This timer does not apply to incoming calls. The timer for incoming calls starts immediately.





4.2


205

Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between two external parties. When the timer expires, the Outside-to-Outside

(CO-to-CO) Line call is disconnected.

Time (minutes): 1 – 32

10 min

1.

Enter 205.

Display: CO-CO Dur. Limit

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time:10min

3.

Enter the time.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new time.

4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None







206

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Dialing Start Time

Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialing after an outside (CO) line is seized.

0 msec / 250 msec / 500 msec / 750 msec / 1000 msec /

1250 msec / 1500 msec (milliseconds)

0 msec

1.

Enter 206.

Display: Dial Start Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time: 0 msec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None



Line Access, Direct

Line Access, Individual


4.2


Interdigit Time

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


208

Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits for an outgoing outside call.

5 sec / 10 sec / 15 sec (seconds)

10 sec

1.

Enter 208.

Display: Interdigit Time

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The interdigit timer applies until the toll restriction check is completed.

When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialing, if “Enable” was selected in program [211] “No Dial

Disconnection”.

• For a single line telephone, an outgoing outside call will be released from a DTMF receiver when the interdigit timer expires.


Toll Restriction


211

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


No Dial Disconnection

Enables or disables disconnecting an outside (CO) line if an extension user does not dial anything within 10 seconds after an outside (CO) line is seized.

Enable (disconnect) / Disable (does not disconnect)

Disable

1.

Enter 211.

Display: No Dial Mode

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the toll restriction check is completed. When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialing, if “Enable” was selected in this program.

None


4.2


Carrier Code Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


300

Assigns carrier codes. This allows the system to recognize a special user-dialed carrier code in order to apply toll restriction. The system disregards the assigned code and toll restriction is applied to the numbers after the code.

• Code number: 01 – 20

• Carrier code number: 10 digits (max.)

All codes – Not stored

1.

Enter 300.

Display: Carrier Excepted

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.

Enter a code number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter code number 01.

Display example: 01:Not Stored

4.

Enter a carrier code number.



5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another code, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and enter the desired code number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• Each carrier code number has a maximum of ten digits, consisting of wild card character and is entered by pressing the PAUSE button.



Toll Restriction for Special Carrier Access


301

4.2


Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Assigns the Toll Restriction class for System Speed Dialing numbers.

Boundary Class-1 / Boundary Class-2 / Boundary Class-3 /

Boundary Class-4 / Boundary Class-5

Boundary Class-1

1.

Enter 301.

Display: SSD Boundary

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Boundary Class-1

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None




4.2


302–305

Toll Restriction — Class 2 – 5 Denied Codes

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


These allow the user to specify which numbers are toll-restricted for each toll restriction class as follows.

Program [302]: restricts COS number 2.

Program [303]: restricts COS numbers 2 and 3.

Program [304]: restricts COS numbers 2 – 4.

Program [305]: restricts COS numbers 2 – 5.

• Code number: 01 – 20

• Toll restriction number: 11 digits


1.

Enter a program address (302 to 305).

Display example: Class-2 Table

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.



Display example: 01: ...........

4.

Enter a toll call number.



5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• There is a maximum of 20 numbers which can be restricted for each program. Each number must have eleven digits, consisting of 0 – 9,

,

# and x (PAUSE button). The character “x” can be used as a wild card character and is entered by pressing the PAUSE button.

• Program [306] “Toll Restriction — Exception Codes” is used to assign exceptions to these numbers. Programs [601]–[603] “TRS – Class of

Service (COS) Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch” are used to set the toll restriction value for each extension.


Toll Restriction


306

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Toll Restriction — Exception Codes

This allows the user to assign numbers which are exceptions to toll restriction specified in programs [302] – [305].

• Code number: 01 – 80

• Exception number: 11 digits


1.

Enter 306.

Display example: Excepted Table

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.



Display example: 01: ...........

4.

Enter an exception number.



5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• There is a maximum of eighty numbers. Each number must have eleven digits, consisting of 0 – 9, , # and x (PAUSE button). The character

“x” can be used as a wild card character and is entered by pressing the

PAUSE button.

• Code numbers 01 – 80 apply to COS number 2, 01 – 60 apply to COS number 3, 01 – 40 apply to COS number 4, and 01 – 20 apply to COS number 5.


Toll Restriction


4.2


Emergency Dial Number Set

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


309

Stores up to five emergency numbers.

Emergency numbers are not subject to toll restriction, Account

Code – Forced/Verify - All modes, Electronic Station Lockout or

Remote Station Lock Control.

• Code number: 1 – 5

• Emergency number: 11 digits (max.)

Code-01 = 911, Other Codes = Not stored

1.

Enter 309.

Display: Emergency Code

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.



Display example: CODE-01:

4.

Enter an emergency number.



5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• Each emergency number has a maximum of eleven digits, consisting of

0 – 9.


Account Code Entry


Emergency Call


Toll Restriction


310

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Account Codes

Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry, Verify – All and Verify – Toll modes. If Verify – All is assigned in program

[605] “Account Code Entry Mode”, an account code is required to make an outside call. If Verify – Toll is assigned, an account code is only required to override toll restriction.

• Code number: 01 – 24

• Account code: 4 digits


1.

Enter 310.

Display: Account Code

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.



Display example: CODE-01:....

4.

Enter an account code.


To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new account code.

5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another code number, press NEXT or PREV, or


7.


8.

Press END.

• Each verifiable account code has 4 digits, consisting of 0 – 9.

• Program [605] “Account Code Entry Mode” is used to select the

Account Code Entry mode.


Account Code Entry



4.2


Automatic Pause Insertion Codes

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


311

Assigns up to 40 automatic pause insertion codes which are checked with the outside outgoing call number. When one of the codes is the same as the call number, the pause time assigned in program [417] “Pause Time” is automatically inserted after the code. If a second dial tone is sent from the Central Office, it is convenient to assign the area code as the pause code.

• Code number: 01 – 40

• Pause code number: 7 digits (max.)


1.

Enter 311.

Display: Auto Pause Code

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.



Display example: CODE-01:.......

4.

Enter a pause code.



5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• Each pause code number has a maximum of seven digits, consisting of

0 – 9,

and #.




312

4.2


Toll Restriction — Station Lock Boundary Class

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Assigns the Toll Restriction COS number when the Electronic

Station Lockout or Remote Station Lock Control is set.

COS-2 / COS-3 / COS-4 / COS-5 / Disable

Disable

1.

Enter 312.

Display: LOCK Boundary

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Boundary Disable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None



Remote Staiton Lock Control



4.2


Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


400

Used to identify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the system. This prevents users from calling a line which is not connected.

• Outside (CO) line number: 1 – 6, ( = all outside (CO) lines)

• Connect / Not Connect

All outside (CO) lines – Connect

1.

Enter 400.

Display: CO Connection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.

Enter an outside (CO) line number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter outside (CO) line number 1.

Display example: CO 1:Connect

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another outside (CO) line, press NEXT or

PREV, or SELECT and enter the desired outside (CO) line

number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all outside (CO) lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

CO :Mixed

.


Outside (CO) Line Connection Assignment


401

4.2


Dial Mode

Description

Each outside (CO) line can be programmed for DTMF, pulse or call blocking. This program assigns the selection to each line.

DTMF: The dialing signals from an extension, either tone or pulse, are converted to tone signals and transmitted to an outside (CO) line.

Pulse: The dialing signals from an extension, either tone or pulse, are converted to pulse signals and transmitted to an outside (CO) line.

Call Blocking: If the Central Office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but the user is contracted for pulse, select this mode. When dialing with a touch tone telephone, only the pulse signals are sent to an outside

(CO) line.

Selection


• DTMF Mode / Pulse Mode / C.BLK Mode (Call Blocking)

Default

Programming

All outside (CO) lines — DTMF Mode

1.

Enter 401.

Display: CO Dial Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:DTMF Mode

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.

Conditions


CO :Mixed

.

• If pulse or call blocking is assigned, set the line pulse speed in program

[402] “Pulse Speed Selection”.



Dial Type Selection


4.2


Pulse Speed Selection

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


402

An outside (CO) line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program

[401] “Dial Mode” can have two pulse rates, 10 pps (low) and

20 pps (high). This program sets the pulse speed for each outside

(CO) line which has set the pulse or call blocking mode.


• Low Speed (10 pps) / High Speed (20 pps)

All outside (CO) lines – Low Speed

1.

Enter 402.

Display: Pulse Speed

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Low Speed

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO :Mixed

.

• The required pulse speed is determined by the outside (CO) or Host

PBX line.


Dial Type Selection


403

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


Host PBX Access Codes

Assigns Host PBX access codes. If the system is installed behind a host PBX system, an access code is required to make an outside call. Up to eight codes can be stored for an outside (CO) line connected to the host PBX.


• Access code: 1 or 2 digits, eight different entries (max.)

All outside (CO) lines – Not stored

1.

Enter 403.

Display: Host PBX Access

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Not Stored

4.

Enter an access code.


To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new access code.

Display example: CO 1:01

5.

To enter more access codes for the same outside (CO) line, press “,” (CONF/SAVE button) and enter the access codes until all of the required entries are completed.

Display example: CO 1:01,08,10,22

6.

Press STORE.

7.



number.

8.


9.

Press END.


4.2


Host PBX Access Codes

(contd.)

Conditions


403

• This program is only required if a host PBX is connected to the system.

• There is a maximum of eight access codes per outside (CO) line. Each code has one or two digits, consisting of 0 – 9.

• When the programmed codes are dialed, Automatic Pause Insertion and

Toll Restriction are applied to all calls. The programmed pause time (in program [417] “Pause Time”) is automatically inserted after the access code.


CO :Mixed

.



Host PBX Access



404

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Outside (CO) Line Group Assignment

Each outside (CO) line must be assigned to an outside (CO) line group (trunk group). This program defines the outside (CO) line group assignment for each outside (CO) line. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, the outside

(CO) lines can be grouped by company.


• Outside (CO) line group (Trunk) number: 1 – 6

CO1 — TRK GRP-1; CO5 — TRK GRP-5;

CO2 — TRK GRP-2; CO6 — TRK GRP-6

CO3 — TRK GRP-3;

CO4 — TRK GRP-4;

1.

Enter 404.

Display: Trunk Group

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:TRK GRP-1

4.

Enter the outside (CO) line group number.

To change the current entry, enter the new outside (CO) line group number.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all outside (CO) lines to the same outside (CO) line group, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

CO :Mixed

.




4.2


405–407

Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


Determines which outside (CO) lines can be accessed by an extension in the day, night and lunch modes. The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned outside (CO) lines.

• Outside (CO) line number: 1 – 6, ( = all outside (CO) lines)

• Jack number: 01 – 24, ( = all jacks)


All outside (CO) lines – Enable — Day/Night/Lunch

1.

Enter a program address (405 for day, 406 for night or 407

for lunch).

Display example: Day Out CO

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:#01:Enable

4.

Enter the desired jack number after pressing the # key.

The user can also keep pressing number is displayed.

or until the desired jack

5.


6.

Press STORE.

7.

To program another jack, press or

, or # and enter the desired jack number.

8.


9.


PREV, or SELECT and the desired outside (CO) line

number.

10.


11.

Press END.

• To assign all jacks or outside (CO) lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3 or 4. In these cases, the display will show:

CO :# :Mixed

.





408–410

4.2


Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Allows more than one extension to ring in the day, night and lunch modes. All incoming calls from the programmed outside (CO) lines are directed to the specified extensions.




All outside (CO) lines – all jacks – Enable — Day/Night/Lunch

1.


for lunch).

Display example: Day In CO

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:#01:Enable

4.

Enter the jack number after pressing the # key.

The user can also keep pressing number is displayed.

or until the desired jack

5.


6.

Press STORE.

7.



8.


9.



number.

10.


11.

Press END.


4.2


408–410

Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

(contd.)

Conditions


• An extension can be assigned as the destination for as many outside

(CO) lines required.

• To assign all jacks or all outside (CO) lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3 or step 4. In these cases, the display will show:

CO :# :Mixed

.


Ringing, Delayed



411–413

4.2


Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Assigns the ringing start time for each jack in the day, night and lunch modes.



• Immdtly (immediate ringing) / 5 sec / 10 sec / 15 sec

All outside (CO) lines – all jacks – Immdtly — Day/Night/Lunch

1.


for lunch).

Display example: Day Delayed CO

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:#01:Immdtly

4.

Enter a jack number after pressing the # key.

The user can also keep pressing

(CO) line number is displayed.

or until the desired outside

5.


6.

Press STORE.

7.



8.


9.



number.

10.


11.

Press END.


4.2


411–413

Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

(contd.)

Conditions


• To assign all jacks or outside (CO) lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3 or step 4. In these cases, the display will show:

CO :# :Mixed

.

• There are four notification methods.

(1) Immediate ringing: rings immediately

(2) 5 second delay

(3) 10 second delay

(4) 15 second delay


Ringing, Delayed



414–416

4.2


Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Selects the mode of an incoming outside call on each outside (CO) line in the day, night and lunch modes. There are the following four modes.

Normal: an incoming outside call will be received at the

DIL: extension(s) assigned in programs [408]–[410].

an incoming outside call will be received at the assigned extension.

DISA1: an incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature. A caller will hear a tone or an outgoing message.

DISA2: an incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature. A caller might hear OGM 2; for various configurations please see Cases 2, 3 and 4 in

Section 3, Features “Outgoing Message (OGM)”.


• Normal / DIL + extension jack number / DISA1 / DISA2

Normal

1.


for lunch).

Display example: CO Day/Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Normal

4.

Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and if “DIL” is selected, enter the extension jack

number.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


4.2


414–416

Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch

(contd.)

Conditions


• “DISA1” must be selected when an optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed and if the user wants to use Internal DISA.

• There are two outgoing messages. Program [502] determines how each message is used.

• To assign all the outside (CO) lines to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

CO :Mixed

.





417

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Pause Time

Assigns the length of the pause time. The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code or host PBX access code programmed in [403] “Host PBX Access Codes”, or can be manually inserted by the user with the PAUSE button.


• Time (seconds): 1.5 sec / 2.5 sec / 3.5 sec / 4.5 sec

All outside (CO) lines — 1.5 sec

1.

Enter 417.

Display: Pause Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:1.5sec

4.

Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO :Mixed

.


Host PBX Access



4.2


Flash Time

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


418

Assigns the length of the flash time. If the system is installed behind a host PBX, External Feature Access (EFA) is necessary to obtain its services. To enable this feature, select the required hooking signal sending time for an outside (CO) line.


• Time (milliseconds): 80 ms / 100 ms / 160 ms / 300 ms / 600 ms /

900 ms / 1200 ms

All outside (CO) lines – 600 ms

1.

Enter 418.

Display: Flash Time Set

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1: 600ms

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• The required flash time is determined by the central office or host PBX lines.


CO :Mixed

.



Flash


419

4.2


Automatic Designated Outside (CO) Line Access

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


Assigns the sequence in which outside (CO) lines will be accessed during the Automatic Line Access mode. When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access (9), an idle line is searched for in the programmed outside (CO) lines.



All outside (CO) lines — Enable

1.

Enter 419.

Display: Auto Line Access

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Enable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO :Mixed

.



Line Preference – Outgoing


4.2


Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

420

Assigns the required minimum duration of the CPC Signal for incoming outside calls. If programmed, the system disconnects the line when the CPC signal is detected.


• Time number (milliseconds): 00 (Disable) / 01 (22 msec) /

02 (30 msec) / 03 (38 msec) / 04 (46 msec) / 05 (54 msec) /


















74 (606 msec) / 75 (614 msec)

All outside (CO) lines – 42 (350 msec)

1.

Enter 420.

Display: CPC Detection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1: N= 42

4.

Enter a time number.

5.

Press STORE.


420

Conditions

4.2


Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal

(contd.)


6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO : N= Mixed

.

• Program [421] “CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls” is used to program

CPC Signal Detection for outgoing outside calls.


Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection


4.2


CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


421

Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during an outside call in progress. If enabled, the system disconnects the line at the time set in program [420] “Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal” when the

CPC signal is detected.


• Enable (detect) / Disable (will not detect)

Disable

1.

Enter 421.

Display: CPC Out Detect

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Disable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO :

.


Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection


422

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Disconnect Time

Determines the amount of time to send the disconnect signal from the system to the Central Office or host PBX.


• Time (seconds): 0.5 sec / 1.5 sec / 4.0 sec

All outside (CO) lines – 1.5 sec

1.

Enter 422.

Display: Disconnect Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:1.5sec

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• The disconnect time must be longer than the requirement of the Central

Office or host PBX.


CO :Mixed

.


Flash


4.2


Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection

Description

423

Assigns an incoming outside call ringing pattern for each outside

(CO) line. There are three types of patterns as follows.

1 s

Single:

Double:

Triple:

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions



• Single / Double / Triple

Single

1.

Enter 423.

Display: CO Ring Pattern

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Single

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO :Mixed

.

• The programs [115] “Extension Ringing Pattern Selection” and

[706] “Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection” should be considered when assigning this program.




500

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection

Condition


Selects the mode of an incoming DISA call. There are two modes as follows.

Without AA: the system can receive an extension number, line access number and operator call number, and send the call to the designated destination.

With AA: the system can receive an extension number, line access number, operator call number and auto attendant (AA) number, and send the call to the designated destination.

Without AA / With AA

Without AA

1.

Enter 500.

Display: DISA Dial Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Without AA

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant” is used to assign the destination of each AA number.




4.2


DISA Built-in Auto Attendant

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


501

Assigns the DISA built-in auto attendant number. The extension number can be assigned as a one digit number and used as a DISA built-in auto attendant number.

• DISA built-in auto attendant (AA) number: 0 – 9

• Jack number: 01 – 24 / Ring Group number: 1 – 8

All numbers — Not stored

1.

Enter 501.

Display: DISA Built-In

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: AA NO?

→

3.

Enter a DISA built-in auto attendant number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter DISA AA number 0.

Display example: 0: Not Stored

4.

Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and enter an extension or ring group number.


Display example: 0: Jack-01

5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another DISA AA number, press NEXT or

PREV, or SELECT and enter the desired DISA AA

number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• To enable this feature, the user must select “With AA” in program

[500] “DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection”.

• This system can store up to ten programmable DISA built-in auto attendant numbers.

• If the user would like to use a line access number “9” and/or operator number “0” in the “With AA” mode, do not assign auto attendant number(s) which correspond to the line access number and/or operator number (0 and/or 9).




502

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


OGM Mode Selection

Selects how the two outgoing messages (OGM) are used. There are two modes as follows.

MODE 1: both OGM1 and OGM2 are used for DISA1 so that the system can receive two incoming calls via DISA at the same time.

MODE 2: OGM1 is used for DISA1 and OGM2 is used for

DISA2.

MODE 1 / MODE 2

MODE 1

1.

Enter 502.

Display: OGM Selection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: MODE 1

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• Program [414]–[416] “Outside (CO) Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch” are used to assign DISA1 or DISA2 to each outside (CO) line according to this assignment.

• If an optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed, this assignment should be “MODE 1”.



Data Line Security



4.2


FAX Connection

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


503

Assigns which jack can receive facsimile data when the system receives a facsimile transmission signal via the Direct Inward

System Access (DISA) feature.

Jack number: 01 – 24 / Disable (Facsimile data cannot be received.)

Disable

1.

Enter 503.

Display: Fax Connection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: FAX :Disable

3.


To assign no FAX jack, press CLEAR.

To delete the jack number, press CLEAR.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The extension assigned as the fax extension will automatically have the

Data Line Security feature set.

• An optional OGM/FAX Detection card is necessary.



Data Line Security

Facsimile Detection


504

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


DISA Delayed Answer Time

Assigns the time from a call being received and answered using the

DISA feature.


3 sec

1.

Enter 504.

Display: Ans Delay Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time: 3sec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The outside (CO) lines which are assigned as “Enable” in program [900]

“Caller ID Assignment” are always set to 6 seconds even if “0 sec” or

“3 sec” is selected in this program.


Caller ID



4.2


DISA Waiting Time after OGM

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


505

Selects the time that the system waits for the DTMF signals or

CNG tone after the outgoing message.


5 sec

1.

Enter 505.

Display: DISA Wait Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time :5sec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.





506

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


DISA Busy Mode

Selects the mode when destination extension of the call via DISA is busy. There are three modes as follows.

Call Waiting: a call waiting tone is sent and then the call is held until the called party responds.

Disconnect: the call is disconnected after the busy tone.

DISA2: OGM2 is sent to the caller and the system waits for another destination when the first destination is busy.

Call Waiting / Disconnect / DISA2

Disconnect

1.

Enter 506.

Display: DISA Busy Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Disconnect

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• In program [502] “OGM Mode Selection”, “MODE2” should be selected if “DISA2” is selected in this program.





4.2


DISA Intercept Mode

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


507

Intercept Routing provides an automatic re-direction of DISA calls which cannot or have not been answered within the programmed time. This program is used to select whether the call is disconnected or re-directed.

Intercept: the call is directed to the extensions assigned in programs [408]–[410].

Disconnect: the call is disconnected.

Disconnect / Intercept

Intercept

1.

Enter 507.

Display: DISA IRNA Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Intercept

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None



Intercept Routing




508

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition

4.2


DISA Ringing Time before Intercept


Selects the time for the Intercept Routing — No Answer (IRNA) feature. If a DISA call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be redirected to the programmed extension.

10 sec / 20 sec / 30 sec / 40 sec / 60 sec / 120 sec (seconds)

20 sec

1.

Enter 508.

Display: DISA Befor IRNA

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• Programs [408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment —

Day/Night/Lunch” are used to program the destination of Intercept

Routing in the day, night and lunch modes.



Intercept Routing


4.2


DISA Ringing Time after Intercept

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


509

Selects the time that the extension will ring for after being re-directed by the Intercept Routing — No Answer (IRNA) feature.

If a call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.

10 sec / 20 sec / 30 sec / 40 sec / 60 sec / 120 sec (seconds)

20 sec

1.

Enter 509.

Display: DISA After IRNA

2.

Press NEXT.


3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None



Intercept Routing


510

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


DISA No Dial Mode

Selects the mode when nothing is dialed after the OGM or a beep after a programmed length of time for the DISA1 and DISA2 modes. There are two modes as follows.

Intercept: the call is directed to the extensions assigned in programs [408]–[410] for the time programmed in

[509] “DISA Ringing Time After Intercept”.

Disconnect: the call is disconnected.

• DISA1 / DISA2

• Intercept / Disconnect

DISA1 and DISA2 — Intercept

1.

Enter 510.

Display: No Dial Mode

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: DISA1:Disconnect

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press NEXT or PREV to program the other parameter.

6.


7.

Press END.

None



Intercept Routing


4.2


DISA Security Type

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


511

Assigns the security mode for outside calls from a DISA (Direct

Inward System Access) caller. There are three modes: None

Security, Trunk Security (outside (CO) line security), and All

Security. None Security mode allows the caller to access an outside

(CO) line without dialing a DISA security code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making an outside call. All Security mode requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside call or an intercom call.

None Security / Trunk Security / All Security

Trunk Security

1.

Enter 511.

Display: Security Type

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Trunk Security

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• Program [512] “DISA Security Codes” is used to program the DISA

Security Codes.




512

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


DISA Security Codes

Assigns the DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Security Codes.

• Code number : 1 – 4

• DISA security code: 4 digits

All codes — Not stored

1.

Enter 512.

Display: Security Code

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE-01:Not Stored

3.


Display example: CODE-01: 1234

4.

Enter a DISA security code.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new code.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• This setting is required if All Security mode or Trunk (outside (CO) line) Security mode is selected in program [511] “DISA Security Type”.

• There are four programmable security codes. Each code should be different and composed of four numerical digits, 0 – 9.

• The used security code numbers (not security codes) are printed on the

SMDR.




4.2


Cyclic Tone Detection

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition

513

Selects the number of times that the system detects the cyclic tone.

The system regards a call as completed after detecting the cyclic tone the programmed number of times.

Disable (will not detect) / 2 Times / 3 Times / 4 Times

4 Times

1.

Enter 513.

Display: Tone Detection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: 4 Times

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.






514

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


FAX Tone Detection

Selects the number of times the CNG tone (FAX tone) is detected.

An incoming fax call via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) feature is detected by the system after receiving the CNG tone the assigned number of times.

1 Time / 2 Times

1 Time

1.

Enter 514.

Display: FAX Detection

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: 1 Time

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.




Facsimile Detection


4.2


Intercept Time for Internal DISA

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


515

Selects the time that the system waits for DTMF signals when a call is received via the internal DISA. If the system does not receive the

DTMF signals within the assigned period of time, the call will be disconnected or sent to extensions programmed in [408]–[410] according to program [510].

3 sec / 6 sec / 9 sec (seconds)

3 sec

1.

Enter 515.

Display: Internal DISA

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time: 3 sec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None




516

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


DISA Incoming Assignment

Assigns the extensions which can receive calls via DISA.

• Jack number: 01 – 24, ( =all jacks)


All jacks — Enable

1.

Enter 516.

Display: DISA Assign

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display example: #01:Enable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• If a caller attempts to access an assigned extension, the caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected.

• If a call via DISA is received by a ring group, this program will not work for extensions in that ring group. In this case, disabled extensions will still ring.


# :Mixed

.




4.2


DISA AA Wait Time

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


517

Selects the time that the system waits for a second digit entry. If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number (AA number) if an AA number is assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”.

For example, if a number is not dialed within the programmed time after dialing 1, the system will assume that “1” is an AA number.

1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 4 sec / 5 sec (seconds)

2 sec

1.

Enter 517.

Display: DISA AA Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Time: 2 sec

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The AA wait timer will only work when “1” or “8” is dialed.




518

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code

Conditions


Enables or disables sending a beep to a caller after the Security

Code is entered. If enabled, a beep is sent to the caller when the code entered is the same as one of the security codes assigned in program [512] “DISA Security Codes”.


Enable

1.

Enter 518.

Display: DISA Dial Tone

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Enable

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None




4.2


Extension Group Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions

600

Assigns an extension group for each extension. Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup, Station Hunting, Paging – Group and Ring Group.


• Extension group number (EXT GRP): 1 – 8

All jacks — EXT GRP-1

1.

Enter 600.

Display: Extension Group

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display example: #01:EXT GRP-1

4.

Enter the extension group number.

To change the current entry, enter the new extension group number.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• There is a maximum of eight extension groups. Each extension can only belong to one group.

• To assign all jacks to the same extension group, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

# :Mixed

.



Call Pickup, Group

Extension Group

Station Hunting

Paging – Group

Ring Group


601–603

4.2


TRS – Class of Service (COS) Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


Programs Toll Restriction (TRS) – Class of Service (COS) for each extension.


• COS-1 / COS-2 / COS-3 / COS-4 / COS-5

All jacks — COS-1

1.

Enter a program address (601 for day, 602 for night, or

603 for lunch).

Display example: Day Toll Restr

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display example: #01: COS-1

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all jacks to the same COS, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

# :Mixed

.


Toll Restriction


4.2


Extension Name Setting

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


604

Assigns names to the extensions.

• Jack number: 01 – 24

• Name: 10 characters (max.)

All jacks – Not stored

1.

Enter 604.

Display: Extension Name

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display: #01:

4.

Enter a name.

For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters”.


To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new name.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• There is a maximum of 24 names. Each name has a maximum of

10 characters.

• Program [009] “Extension Number Assignment” is used to assign the extension numbers.



Display, in Idle

Intercom Calling


605

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

4.2


Account Code Entry Mode

Selects the account code input mode for each extension jack. There are four account code modes: Option, Forced, Verify-All and

Verify-Toll.

Option mode:

The user can enter any account code, if needed.

Forced mode:

The user must always enter an account code.

The code can be any number.

Verify – All mode:

The user must always enter a pre-assigned account code to make an outside call.

Verify – Toll mode: The user can enter an assigned account code to override toll restriction. The toll restriction

COS numbers 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to the COS number 2. (The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed.)


• Option / Forced / Verify – All / Verify – Toll

All jacks – Option

1.

Enter 605.

Display: Call Accounting

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display: #01:Option

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


4.2


Account Code Entry Mode

(contd.)

605

Conditions


# :Mixed

.

• Program [310] “Account Codes” is used to define the Account Codes for the Verify modes.

• Programs [601]–[603] “TRS – Class of Service (COS) Assignment —

Day/Night/Lunch” is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension.



Account Code Entry



606

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Call Transfer to an Outside (CO) Line

Enables or disables performing the Call Transfer to an Outside

(CO) Line feature.



Disable

1.

Enter 606.

Display: Transfer to CO

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.




4.2


Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


607

Enables or disables performing the Call Forwarding to an Outside

(CO) Line feature.



All jacks – Disable

1.

Enter 607.

Display: CO Forward

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.




608

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Executive Busy Override

Enables or disables performing Executive Busy Override –

Extension/Outside (CO) Line. Executive Busy Override allows a user to interrupt an established call.




1.

Enter 608.

Display: Busy Override

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.


Executive Busy Override – Extension

Executive Busy Override – Outside (CO) Line


4.2


Do Not Disturb Override

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


609

Enables or disables performing the Do Not Disturb (DND)

Override feature.




1.

Enter 609.

Display: DND Override

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.




610

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Paralleled Telephone Connection

A Paralleled Telephone Connection allows a single line telephone to be connected to the same jack as a proprietary telephone. This program assigns which jacks can perform the paralleled telephone connection feature.




1.

Enter 610.

Display: Parallel Connect

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.




4.2


TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension

611

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


Assigns the jacks that can accept a TAM connection. When a jack is TAM-enabled, the “Call Retrieving from a TAM” feature becomes available.




1.

Enter 611.

Display: TAM Extension

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.


Call Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)


612

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Room Monitor Assignment

Assigns which extensions can be monitored by another telephone.




1.

Enter 612.

Display: Room Monitor

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.




4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


# :Mixed

.

• The jacks which are assigned to “DISABLE” cannot accept feature number “7351#” for the room monitor feature.


Room Monitor


4.2


Wireless PT Port Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions

617

Used to identify whether the Panasonic Wireless Phone (e.g.

KX-T7880 or KX-T7885) is connected to an extension jack or not.


• Not Connect / Connect

All jacks – Not Connect

1.

Enter 617.

Display: Wireless PT Port

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display example: #01:Not Connect

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all jacks to the same selection, press the key in step 3.

In this case, the display will show:

# :Mixed

.

• If “Connect” is not assigned for the jack which is connected the

Panasonic Wireless Phone, the wireless phone may work incorrectly.


700–702

4.2


Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4-114

These programs assign which extensions will ring when a doorphone call is received in the day, night and lunch modes.

• Doorphone number: 1 – 4, ( = all doorphones)



All doorphones – all jacks – Enable — Day/Night/Lunch

1.


for lunch).

Display example: Day Door Phone

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Door NO?

→

3.

Enter a doorphone number.

Pressing NEXT also can enter doorphone number 1.

Display example: DP-1:#01:Enable

4.

Keep pressing until the desired jack number is displayed or enter a jack number after pressing the # key.

5.


6.

Press STORE.

7.

To program another jack, press or , or # and the desired jack number.

8.


9.

To program another doorphone, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and enter the desired doorphone number.

10.


11.

Press END.

• To assign all doorphones and all jacks to the same selection, press the key in steps 3 and 4.


DP:# :Mixed

.

• Four doorphones can be installed to the system.


Doorphone Call


System Programming

703–705

4.2


Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


These programs assign which extensions can open a door in the day, night and lunch modes.

• Door opener number: 1 – 4, ( = all door openers)



All door openers – all jacks – Enable

1.

Enter a program address (703 for day, 704 for night or

705 for lunch).

Display example: Day Door-Open

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Door NO?

→

3.

Enter a door opener number.


Display example: DP-1:#01:Enable

4.

Keep pressing until the desired jack number is displayed or enter a jack number after pressing the # key.

5.


6.

Press STORE.

7.

To program another jack number, press or , or # and the desired jack number.

8.


9.

To program another door opener, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and enter the desired door opener number.

10.


11.

Press END.

• To assign all door openers and all jacks to the same selection, press the key in steps 3 and 4.


DP:# :Mixed

.

• Four door openers can be installed per system.


Door Opener



4.2


Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection

706

Description

Assigns an incoming doorphone call ringing pattern for each doorphone. There are four types of patterns as follows.

1 s

Single:

Double:

Triple:

S-Double:

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4-116


• Single / Double / Triple / S-Double

All doorphones — Triple

1.

Enter 706.

Display: Door Ring Tone

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Door NO?

→

3.



Display example: DP-1:Triple

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all doorphones to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

DP:Mixed

.

• PT users will hear the assigned pattern tone instead of ringing.

• The programs [115] “Extension Ringing Pattern Selection” and [423]

“Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern Selection” should be considered when assigning this program.


Doorphone Call

System Programming

4.2


Doorphone Access Tone Selection

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


707

Enables or disables sending a doorphone access tone to a monitored doorphone. If enabled, the access tone is heard from the doorphone when monitoring starts.



All doorphones — Enable

1.

Enter 707.

Display: Door Ack-Tone

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Door NO?

→

3.



Display example: DP-1:Enable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


DP:Mixed

.


Doorphone Call

Room Monitor


708

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


4.2


Doorphone Ringing Time

Selects the doorphone ringing time.


• 15 sec / 30 sec (seconds)

All doorphones — 15 sec

1.

Enter 708.

Display: Doorphone R-Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Door NO?

→

3.



Display example: DP-1:15 sec

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.


DP:Mixed

.


Doorphone Call


4.2


Door Opener Time

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


709

Selects the door opener time. The door is unlocked for the assigned period of time.

• Door Opener number: 1 – 4, ( = all door openers)

• 1 sec / 2 sec / 3 sec / 4 sec / 5 sec / 6 sec / 7 sec / 8 sec (seconds)

All door openers — 5 sec

1.

Enter 709.

Display: Door-Opner Time

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Door NO?

→

3.

Enter a door opener number.


Display example: DP-1: 5 sec

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

To program another door opener, press NEXT or PREV, or

SELECT and enter the desired door opener number.

7.


8.

Press END.

• To assign all door openers to the same selection, press the key in step 3. In this case, the display will show:

DP:Mixed

.


Door Opener


800

4.2


SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters

Description

Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface

(RS-232C).

New line code: Selects the code for the printer or personal computer. If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select “CR”. If not, select “CR+LF”.

Baud rate: The baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer.

Word length: The word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.

Parity: The parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make the selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.

Stop bit: The stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select a value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.

Selection

• New line code: CR+LF / CR

(CR=Carriage Return, LF=Line Feed)

• Baud rate (baud): 150 / 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600

• Word length (bits): 7 / 8

• Parity bit: None / Mark / Space / Even / Odd

• Stop bit length (bits): 1 / 2

Default

New line code = CR+LF;

Baud rate = 9600;

Word length = 8;

Parity bit = Mark;

Stop bit = 1

Programming

1.

Enter 800.

Display example: RS232C Parameter

2.

Press NEXT to program the new line code.

Display example: NL-Code:CR+LF

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press NEXT to program the baud rate.

Display example: Baud Rate:9600B


4.2


SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters

(contd.)

800

Condition

6.


7.

Press STORE.

8.

Press NEXT to program the word length.

Display example: Word Length:8bit

9.


10.

Press STORE.

11.

Press NEXT to program the parity bit.

Display example: Parity:Mark

12.


13.

Press STORE.

14.

Press NEXT to program the stop bit.

Display example: Stop Bit:1bit

15.


16.

Press STORE.

17.

Press END.

• The following combinations are invalid.

Parity

Mark

Space

Space

Word Length

8

8

8

Stop Bit

2

1

2





801

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


SMDR Parameter

Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer. The page length determines the number of lines per page.

The skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.

• Page length (lines): 4 – 99

• Skip perforation (lines): 0 – 95

Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0

1.

Enter 801.

Display: SMDR Parameter

2.

Press NEXT to program the page length.

Display example: Page Length:66

3.

Enter the page length.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new page length.

4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press NEXT to program the skip perforation.

Display example: Skip Perf: 0

6.

Enter the skip perforation.

To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new skip perforation.

7.

Press STORE.

8.

Press END.

• The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.

• The title is placed on the first three lines of every page.

• The programmed format becomes valid only if the Serial Interface

(RS-232C) cable is connected. If a printer is already connected, disconnect it and connect again. Otherwise the previous format will be used.




4.2


Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


802

Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout.

• Outgoing calls: On (all calls) / Off (no printing) / Toll (printing toll calls only)

• Incoming calls: On (all calls) / Off (no printing)

Outgoing calls – On;

Incoming calls – On

1.

Enter 802.

Display: Call Printing

2.

Press NEXT to program outgoing calls.

Display: Outgoing:On

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press NEXT to program incoming calls.

Display: Incoming:On

6.


7.

Press STORE.

8.

Press END.

• A printer must be connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port provided on the system.

• When “Toll” is selected, only calls which are checked in programs

[302]–[305] “Toll Restriction — Class 2 – 5 Denied Codes” and are allowed, are printed out.




803

4.2


Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing Printing

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Enables or disables printing out the secret dial numbers stored in speed dialing and one-touch dialing on the SMDR.

• No printing / Printing

No printing

1.

Enter 803.

Display: Secret Printing

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: No Printing

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

None


Secret Dialing



4.2


System Data Dump

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

804

Starts or stops printing the assigned data. All or a specific area of current programmed data is printed out. The areas are as follows.

All Para:

All data

System Para: All data except the following programs.

CO Para:

Programmed data of [400]–[403], [405]–[423] and

[900].

Ext Para:

Programmed data of [102], [516], [600]–[620], and

[904] and [905] if a proprietary telephone is connected. The assigned data on the PF

(Programmable Feature) buttons and CO buttons are also printed out.

Programmed data of [102], [516] and [600]–[612] if a single line telephone is connected. The stored

Personal Speed Dialing numbers are also printed out.

DSS Para:

Data assigned to DSS buttons and PF buttons on the

DSS Consoles.

Speed Dial:

Programmed data of [001]

Stop Output: Stops printing.

All Para / System Para / CO Para + outside (CO) line number:

1 – 6,

( = all outside (CO) lines) /

Ext Para + jack number: 01 – 24,

( = all jacks) /

DSS Para + DSS Console number: 1 or 2,

( = all DSS

Consoles) / Speed Dial / Stop Output

Not applicable.

1.

Enter 804.

Display: System Data Dump

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Menu:All Para

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

If CO Para, Ext Para or DSS Para is selected, enter an

outside (CO) line, jack or DSS Console number.

6.

Press STORE.

7.

Press END.


804

Condition


4.2


System Data Dump

(contd.)

• A printer must be connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port provided on the system.




4.2


SMDR Account Code Selection

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Condition


805

Selects the account code type printed on the SMDR.

There are the following two types.

CODE: the 4-digit account code number programmed in

[310] “Account Codes”.

INDEX: a 2-digit code number (01 – 24).

CODE / INDEX

CODE

1.

Enter 805.

Display: Account Select

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: CODE

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• The printing of the index of the account code only occurs if the extension user entered their account code in the “Verify – All” or

“Verify – Toll” input mode as programmed in [605] “Account Code

Entry Mode”.


Account Code Entry



900

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Caller ID Assignment

Enables or disables the Caller ID feature for outside (CO) lines which have contracted the Caller ID Service by a Central Office.



All outside (CO) lines – Disable

1.

Enter 900.

Display: CID Assign

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CO NO?

→

3.



Display example: CO 1:Disable

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.



number.

7.


8.

Press END.


CO :Mixed

.

• An optional Caller ID card is required.


Caller ID


4.2


Caller ID Area Code Assignment

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


901

Assigns the required area code when using the Caller ID feature.

By assigning the area code, the system records the caller’s phone number modified by programs [902] “Caller ID Modification for

Local Calls” and [903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance

Calls”.

• Code number: 1 – 5

• Area code: 6 digits max.


1.

Enter 901.

Display: CID Area Code

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: CODE NO?

→

3.



Display example: CODE-01:......

4.

Enter an area code.


To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new area code.

5.

Press STORE.

6.



7.


8.

Press END.

• The area code can be six digits long. Valid numbers are from 0 to 9.



Call Log, Incoming

Caller ID


902

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions

4.2


Caller ID Modification for Local Calls


Assigns the removed digits from a received local caller’s number, and adds a number to make the final number which serves as the

Caller ID number. The system records the modified caller’s number in the incoming call log list so that the extension user can call back the caller.

Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received number.

• Number of digits to be deleted: 0 – 9 (0 = no deletion)

• Number to be added: 4 digits (max.)

Deleted digits – 3; Added number – blank

1.

Enter 902.

Display: CID Local Call

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Del:3 Add:

3.

Enter the number of digits to be deleted.


4.

Press to program the number to be added, if required.

5.

Enter the number to be added.


6.

Press STORE.

7.

Press END.

• The added number has a maximum of 4 digits, consisting of 0 – 9, and #.



Call Log, Incoming

Caller ID


4.2


Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls

903

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


Assigns the removed digits from a received long distance caller’s number, and adds a number to make the final number which serves as the Caller ID number. The system records the modified caller’s number in the incoming call log list so that the extension user can call back the caller.

Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received number.

• Number of digits to be deleted: 0 – 9 (0 = no deletion)

• Number to be added: 4 digits (max.)

Deleted digits – 0; Added number – 1

1.

Enter 903.

Display: CID LD Call

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: Del:0 Add:1

3.

Enter the number of digits to be deleted.


4.

Press to program the number to be added, if required.

5.

Enter the number to be added.


6.

Press STORE.

7.

Press END.

• The added number has a maximum of 4 digits, consisting of 0 – 9, and #.



Call Log, Incoming

Caller ID


904

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


4.2


Caller ID Log Priority Selection

Selects the first display of an incoming outside call by the Caller ID service.


• Number / Name

All jacks – Name

1.

Enter 904.

Display: CID Priority

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Jack NO?

→

3.



Display example: #01:Name

4.


5.

Press STORE.

6.

Press END.

• This program is available when the Caller ID service provides both the name and number. If only the number is provided, this program is not necessary.


CO :Mixed

.



Caller ID


4.2


Caller ID SMDR Format

Description

Selection

Default

Programming

Conditions


906

Selects whether a Caller ID number is printed out or not on the

SMDR.

Without CID (not printed) / With CID (printed)

With CID

1.

Enter 906.

Display: CID SMDR Format

2.

Press NEXT.

Display example: With CID

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

Press END.

• Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed.



Caller ID



998

Description

Programming

Conditions


4.2


ROM Version

Confirms the System ROM version.

Display example:

Y501B 980430(M)

Version Date

1.

Enter 998.

Display: ROM Version

2.

Press NEXT.

The display shows the system ROM version.

3.

Press END.

None

None


4.2


System Data Clear

Description

Selection

Programming

Condition


999

Clears the system data which have been programmed. The system will re-start with the default settings.

All Para / System Para / CO Para + outside (CO) line number:

1 – 6,

( = all outside (CO) lines) /

Ext Para + jack number: 01 – 24,

( = all jacks) /

DSS Para + DSS Console number: 1 or 2,

( = all DSS

Consoles) / Speed Dial

1.

Enter 999.

Display: System Clear

2.

Press NEXT.

Display: Menu:All Para

3.


4.

Press STORE.

5.

If CO Para, Ext Para or DSS Para is selected, enter an

outside (CO) line, jack or DSS Console number.

6.

Press STORE.

7.

Press END.

• Please refer to program [804] for each parameter.


System Data Default Set



Section 5

List

This section lists the tone, ring and default values of system programming.

5.1

Tone/Ring Tone

< TONE >

Confirmation Tone 1



Dial Tone 1

Dial Tone 2

Dial Tone 3

Busy Tone

Reorder Tone

Ringback Tone

Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone

Outside-to-Outside

(CO-to-CO) Line

Call Limit Warning Tone

Call Waiting Tone 1


(Single)


(Double)


(Triple)

Hold Alarm

1 s

15 s

5 s

15 s

5-2 List

5.1

Tone/Ring Tone

< RING TONE >

Incoming Calls (Single) /

Hold Recall (Outside calls)

Incoming Calls (Double) /

Hold Recall (Intercom calls)

Incoming Calls (Triple) /

Timed Reminder

Callback Ringing (Camp-on

Recall) / Doorphone Ringing

(S-Double)

1 s

List 5-3

5.2

Default Values

Address Program



[002] System Password

[003] DSS Console Port Assignment

[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS

Console


[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service

Changing Mode

[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start

Time



[010] LCD Time Display Selection



[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/

KX-TVS100

[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVS75/

KX-TVS100




[107] DTMF Receiver Check

[108] Flash Mode for a Station Locked

Extension

[109] CO Indicator Assignment



[112] DSS Console Indication Mode

Default

98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM

All speed dial numbers – Not stored

1234

All DSS Consoles — Disable

DSS1 – Disable, DSS2 – Disable

With Transfer

Manual

Every day of the week

— Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:00 PM /

Lunch-S – None / Lunch-E – None

Jack-01

Jack 01 – 24 = Ext 101 – 124

12 HOUR

All extension groups — Disable

All extension groups – Terminate


Disable

Hold-1

Enable

Enable

All DTMF receivers — Enable

Disable

Enable

MODE 2

External

Enable

5-4 List

5.2

Default Values

Address Program Default




[119] Redialing After Pulse to Tone Conversion

[125] Toll Restriction Check for and #








[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line

Duration Time Limit



[211] No Dial Disconnection


[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed

Dialing Boundary Class

[302]–[305] Toll Restriction — Class 2 – 5

Denied Codes

[306] Toll Restriction — Exception Codes

[309] Emergency Dial Number Set

[310] Account Codes

[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes

[312] Toll Restriction — Station Lock

Boundary Class

Double

Enable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

Disable

30 sec

30 sec

15 sec delay

3 sec

10 s after dial

10 min

0 msec

10 sec

Disable


Boundary Class-1



Code-01 = 911, Other Codes = Not stored



Disable

List 5-5

5.2

Default Values

Address

[400] Outside (CO) Line Connection

Assignment

[401] Dial Mode

Program




[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialing

Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch

[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment

— Day/Night/Lunch

[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment

— Day/Night/Lunch

[414]–[416] Outside (CO) Line Mode

— Day/Night/Lunch

[417] Pause Time

[418] Flash Time

[419] Automatic Designated Outside (CO)

Line Access




[423] Outside (CO) Line Ringing Pattern

Selection

[500] DISA Incoming Dialing Mode Selection





[505] DISA Waiting Time After OGM

Default

All outside (CO) lines – Connect

All outside (CO) lines — DTMF Mode

All outside (CO) lines – Low Speed

All outside (CO) lines – Not stored



CO5 — TRK GRP-5; CO6 — TRK GRP-6

All outside (CO) lines – all jacks – Enable

— Day/Night/Lunch

All outside (CO) lines – all jacks – Enable

— Day/Night/Lunch

All outside (CO) lines – all jacks – Immdtly

— Day/Night/Lunch

All outside (CO) lines – Normal

All outside (CO) lines — 1.5 sec

All outside (CO) lines – 600 ms

All outside (CO) lines — Enable

All outside (CO) lines – 42 (350 msec)

Disable

All outside (CO) lines – 1.5 sec

Single

Without AA

All numbers — Not stored

MODE 1

Disable

3 sec

5 sec

5-6 List

5.2

Default Values

Address Program






[511] DISA Security Type

[512] DISA Security Codes

[513] Cyclic Tone Detection


[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA

[516] DISA Incoming Assignment


[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security

Code


[601]–[603] TRS – Class of Service (COS)

Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch




[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO)

Line


[609] Do Not Disturb Override


[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)

Extension

[612] Room Monitor Assignment

[617] Wireless PT Port Assignment

Default

Disconnect

Intercept

20 sec

20 sec

DISA1 and DISA2 — Intercept

Trunk Security


4 Times

1 Time

3 sec

All jacks — Enable

2 sec

Enable

All jacks — EXT GRP-1

All jacks — COS-1

— Day/Night/Lunch

All jacks – Not stored

All jacks – Option








All jacks – Not Connect

List 5-7

5.2

Default Values

Address

Parameters

Program

[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment

— Day/Night/Lunch

[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment

— Day/Night/Lunch

[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern

Selection



[709] Door Opener Time

[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication


[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for

Printing

[803] Secret Speed Dialing/One-Touch Dialing

Printing

[804] System Data Dump





[903] Caller ID Modification for Long

Distance Calls



[998] ROM Version


Default

All doorphones – all jacks – Enable

— Day/Night/Lunch

All door openers – all jacks – Enable

— Day/Night/Lunch

All doorphones — Triple

All doorphones — Enable

All doorphones — 15 sec

All door openers — 5 sec

New line code = CR+LF; Baud rate = 9600;

Word length = 8; Parity bit = Mark;

Stop bit = 1

Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0

Outgoing calls – On; Incoming calls – On

No printing

Not applicable.

CODE

All outside (CO) lines – Disable


Deleted digits – 3; Added number – blank

Deleted digits – 0; Added number – 1

All jacks – Name

With CID

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

5-8 List

Section 6

Troubleshooting

This section provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.

6.1

Installation

Extension does not operate.

Improper reset operation.

Noise during external paging.

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE

Something is wrong with the printed circuit board

(Extension Card).

Something is wrong with the connection between the system and extension.

A telephone with an A-A1 relay is connected.

Something is wrong with the extension.

POSSIBLE SOLUTION

Exchange the printed circuit board with another printed circuit board.

Take the extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord. If the telephone works correctly, the connection between the system and the extension must be repaired.

Use a 2 wire cord.

Set the A-A1 relay switch on the telephone to the “OUT” or “OFF” position.

Take the extension and plug it into another extension port that is working. If the telephone does not work, replace the phone.

Turn the Power Switch off and on.

Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier.

Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.

Volume distortion from external music source.

Speed Dialing or One-

Touch Dialing does not function.

A proprietary telephone connected to extension jacks 01 through 08,

09 through 16, or

17 through 24 does not operate, but a single line telephone operates.

6-2 Troubleshooting

Excessive input level from external music source.

Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source.

Wrong programming.

An extension (H, L) jack

01 through 08, 09 through

16, or 17 through 24 may have been shorted.

Enter an outside (CO) line access number (9, 81 through 86) in programming.

Turn the Power Switch off and fix the shorted part, then turn the

Power Switch on.

6.2

Connection

Can you dial an extension?

Yes

Can you dial out using an outside (CO) line?

No

Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone:

CAUSE

T/R is connected to H/L.

H

¡

T ¡

R ¡

L ¡

KX-TA624

¡ H

¡ T

¡ R

¡ L extension

SOLUTION

Use the correct cord

(the inner 2 wires are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are for

H/L).

Connection between the system and a single line telephone:

CAUSE

T/R is connected to H/L.

H ¡

T ¡

R ¡

L ¡

KX-TA624

¡

¡ T

¡ R

¡ extension

SOLUTION

Use the correct cord

(the inner 2 wires are for

T/R).

Connection between the system and a single line telephone that is polaritysensitive:

CAUSE

“T” is connected to “R”.

H ¡

T ¡

R ¡

L ¡

KX-TA624

¡

¡ T

¡ R

¡ extension

SOLUTION

Reverse the connections of

T/R.

No

Connection between the central office and the system:

CAUSE

Outside (CO) lines are connected to H/L.

¡

¡

¡

¡ T

¡ R

¡

Outside (CO) line KX-TA624

SOLUTION

Reconnect the outside (CO) lines to T/R using 2-conductor wiring.

Troubleshooting 6-3

6.3

Operation

PROBLEM

When using the speakerphone with a proprietary telephone, KX-T7130 or

KX-T7030, nothing is heard.

The unit does not ring.

PROBABLE CAUSE

The HANDSET/HEADSET selector on the KX-T7130 or KX-T7030 is set to the

“HEADSET” position.

When the headset is not used, set the HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the “HANDSET” position.

The Ringer Volume

Selector is set to “OFF”.

During a power failure, the extension connected to

JACK 01 or 09 does not operate.

A PT is connected to the jack.

POSSIBLE SOLUTION

Set to “HIGH” or “LOW”.

Disconnect the PT and connect a single line telephone.

Originating an outside call cannot be performed.

A tone type single line telephone (SLT) user cannot make a call.

The corresponding CO button does not exist on the proprietary telephone.

There may be something wrong with a DTMF receiver.

Program the CO button. See the

Flexible Button Assignment in the

User Manual.

1. Select “Enable” for DTMF receiver 1 and “Disable” for

DTMF receiver 2 in program

[107].

2. Make a call using a tone type

SLT connected to one of extension jacks 01 – 08.

3. If you cannot make the call, the problem may have been caused by DTMF receiver 1. If the call can be made, go to step 4.

4. Try DTMF receiver 2. Select

“Disable” for DTMF receiver

1 and “Enable” for DTMF receiver 2 in program [107], and make another call. If you cannot make the call, the problem may have been caused by DTMF receiver 2. If the call can be made, go to step 5.

5. Check the other four DTMF receivers in the same way. Refer to program [107].

6-4 Troubleshooting

Section 7

Programming Tables

This section provides a hard copy reference for entering user-programmed data.

7 Programming Tables

Default

Change

Year

(00 – 99)

’98

Month

(Jan. – Dec.)

Jan.

[000] Date and Time Setting

Day

(1 – 31)

1

Day of the week

(Sun – Sat)

Thu

Hour

(1 – 12)

12

Minute

(00 – 59)

00

AM / PM

AM

Default

[002] System Password

Parameter: 4 digits, 0 – 9

1 2 3 4

Selection

Default

DSS 1

DSS 2

[003]

DSS Console Port Assignment

DSS console jack no. (02…24) / Disable

All: Disable

[005]

One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button

With Transfer

Without Transfer

Default

✓

Selection

[004]

Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console

Paired telephone jack no. (01…24) / Disable

DSS 1 – Disable / DSS 2 – Disable

[006]

Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode

Manually

Automatically

Default

✓

Selection

Day

Night

Lunch-S

Lunch-E

Default

Every day

9:00 AM

5:00 PM

None

None

[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time

Every day Sun.

Mon.

Tue.

Change

Wed.

Thu.

[008] Operator Assignment

Operator

Default

Jack-01

Jack no.

Fri.

Sat.

[010] LCD Time Display Selection

12 HOUR

24 HOUR

Default

✓

Selection

7-2 Programming Tables


25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

SPD no.

Default

00

01

02

03

04

33

34

35

36

29

30

31

32

37

38

39

[001] System Speed Dialing Entry

Telephone number (32 digits max.) Telephone number (32 digits max.)

72

73

74

75

68

69

70

71

76

77

78

79

64

65

66

67

60

61

62

63

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

SPD no.

All: Not stored

40

41

42

43

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

Programming Tables 7-3


SPD no.

Default

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

(Continued)

Telephone number (32 digits max.) SPD no.

All: Not stored

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

Telephone number (32 digits max.)

Extension jack no.

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20

[009]

Extension Number Assignment

112

113

114

115

108

109

110

111

Default

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

120

121

122

123

124

116

117

118

119

Extension no.

(100…199)

Change

[600]

Extension Group Assignment

Extension group no. (1…8)

Default: All – Group 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


[604]

Extension Name Setting

Extension name

(10 character max.)

Default: All – Not stored


Selection

Disable

Enable

Default

All

✓

[100] Hunting Group Set

Extension group no. (1…8,

*: all)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*

Selection

Terminate

Circular

Default

All

✓

[101] Station Hunting Type

Extension group no. (1…8,

*: all)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

*

Selection

Disable

Enable

[102]

Voice Mail Port for KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Default

All

✓

Extn. jack no. (07, 08, 15, 16,

*: all)

07 08 15 16

*

Default

All

✓

1

[107]

DTMF Receiver Check

DTMF receiver no. (1…6)

2 3 4 5 6

Selection

Default

Change

[103] DTMF

Integration for

KX-TVS75/KX-TVS100

Enable Disable

✓

Hold-1

✓

[104]

Hold Mode Selection

Hold-2 Hold-3

[105]

Conference Tone

Enable

✓

Disable

[106] External

Paging Access Tone

Enable

✓

Disable

Selection

Default

Change

[108] Flash Mode for a

Station Locked Extension

Enable Disable

✓

[109] CO Indicator

Assignment

Enable

✓

Disable

[110]

Flash Key Mode

MODE 1 MODE 2

✓

[111]

Hold Music Selection

External

✓

Tone

Selection

Default

Change

[112] DSS Console

Indication Mode

Enable

✓

Disable



Selection

Default

Change

[115] Extension Ringing

Pattern Selection

Single Double

✓

Triple

[117]

Call Pickup Tone

Enable

✓

Disable

[118]

Pulse Restriction

Enable

✓

Disable

Selection

Default

Change

[119] Redialing after

Pulse to Tone Conversion

Enable Disable

✓

[125] Toll Restriction

Check for

*

Enable

✓

Disable

Selection

Default

Change

[130] Voice Mail 1 APT Port

Port 7

for KX-TVS50

Port 7 & 8 Disable

✓

[131] Voice Mail 2 APT Port for KX-TVS50

Port 15 Port 15 & 16 Disable

✓

Selection

Default

Change

30 sec

✓

1 min

[200] Hold Recall Time

1.5 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min Disable

Selection

Default

Change

[201]

Transfer Recall Time

15 sec 30 sec

✓

1 min 2 min

Call Forwarding Start Time

5 sec

[202]

10 sec 15 sec

✓

20 sec

[203]

Pickup Dial Delay Time

1 sec 2 sec 3 sec

✓

4 sec

Selection

Default

Change

5 sec 10 sec

✓

[204] Call Duration Count Start Time

15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 35 sec 40 sec 45 sec 50 sec Instantly



Selection

Default

Change

[205] Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Duration Time Limit

1…32 minutes

10 minutes

Selection

Default

Change

0 ms

✓

[206] Dialing Start Time

250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms 1250 ms 1500 ms

Selection

Default

Change

5 sec

[208] Interdigit Time

10 sec

✓

15 sec

[211] No Dial Disconnection

Enable Disable

✓

CODE no.

Default: All

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

[300] Carrier Code Assignment

Carrier code (10 digits max.) CODE no.

Not stored

15

16

17

18

19

20

11

12

13

14

Carrier code (10 digits max.)

[301] Toll Restriction — System Speed Dialing Boundary Class

Selection

Default

Change

Class-1

✓

Class-2 Class-3 Class-4 Class-5



09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

CODE no.

Default

01

02

03

04

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

[302] Toll Restriction –

Class 2 Denied Codes







Telephone no. (11 digits)

All: Not stored


7

CODE no.

Default

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

37

38

39

40

33

34

35

36

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04


[306] Toll Restriction – Exception Codes

Telephone no. (11 digits) CODE no.

All: Not stored

69

70

71

72

65

66

67

68

61

62

63

64

57

58

59

60

77

78

79

80

73

74

75

76

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

Telephone no. (11 digits)



CODE no.

Default

01

02

03

04

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

CODE no.

Default

1

4

5

2

3

[309] Emergency Dial Number Set

Emergency no. (11 digits max.)

Code-01 = 911, Other codes = Not stored

[310] Account Codes

Account code (4 digits) CODE no.

All: Not stored

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

Account code (4 digits)



10

11

12

13

06

07

08

09

CODE no.

Default

01

02

03

04

05

18

19

20

14

15

16

17

[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes

Pause code (7 digits max.)

[312] Toll Restriction – Station Lock Boundary Class

Default

✓

Change

Disable

COS-2

COS-3

COS-4

COS-5

34

35

36

37

30

31

32

33

38

39

40

CODE no.

All: Not stored

21

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

Pause code (7 digits max.)



Outside line no.

Default

1

2

5

6

*

3

4

Outside line no.

Default: All

1

2

5

6

*

3

4

[400] Outside (CO) Line

Connection Assignment

Connect

✓

Selection

No Connect DTMF

✓

[401] Dial Mode

Selection

Pulse

Call Blocking

[402]

Pulse Speed Selection

Low Speed

✓

Selection

High Speed

[403] Host PBX Access Codes

Access codes

(1 or 2 digits, 8 different codes max.)

All: Not stored

[404] Outside (CO)

Line Group Assignment

Outside line group no.

(1…6)

Change Default

1

2

5

6

3

4

—



[405] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Day

Outside line 1 Outside line 2 Outside line 3 Outside line 4 Outside line 5 Outside line 6

* (All)

Extension jack no.

Default: All

Selection

Enable

✓

Disable Enable

✓

Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20



[406] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Night


* (All)

Extension jack no.

Default: All

Selection

Enable

✓

Disable Enable

✓


✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20



[407] Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment — Lunch


* (All)

Extension jack no.

Default: All

Selection

Enable

✓

Disable Enable

✓


✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20



[408] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day


* (All)

Extension jack no.

Default: All

Selection

Enable

✓

Disable Enable

✓


✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20



[409] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Night


* (All)

Extension jack no.

Default: All

Selection

Enable

✓

Disable Enable

✓


✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20



[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Lunch


* (All)

Extension jack no.

Default: All

Selection

Enable

✓

Disable Enable

✓


✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20



[411] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day

Extension jack no.

Default: All

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20

I

✓


* (All)

Selection (I: Immediately, 5: 5 seconds delay, 10: 10 seconds delay, 15: 15 seconds delay)

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15



[412] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Night

Extension jack no.

Default: All

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20

I

✓


* (All)


5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15



[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Lunch

Extension jack no.

Default: All

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20

I

✓


* (All)


5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15 I

✓

5 10 15



Outside line no.

Default: All

1

2

5

6

*

3

4

N

✓


Mode — Day


Mode — Night


Mode — Lunch

Selection — N: Normal, DIL + Extension jack no. (01…24), D1: DISA1, D2: DISA2

DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 N

✓

DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 N

✓

DIL Extn. no. D1 D2

Outside line no.

Default: All

1

2

5

6

*

3

4

[417] Pause Time

1.5

✓

Selection (seconds)

2.5

3.5

4.5

80

100

[418] Flash Time

Selection (milliseconds)

160 300 600

✓

900

Outside line no.

Default: All

1

2

3

4

5

6

*

[419] Automatic Designated

Outside (CO) Line Access

Enable

✓

Selection

Disable

[420] Calling Party

Control (CPC) Signal

Selection: 00 (Disable),

01 (22 msec)…75 (614 msec)

42 (350 milliseconds)

1200

[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls

Enable

Selection

Disable

✓



Outside line no.

Default: All

1

2

5

6

*

3

4

[422]

Disconnect Time

0.5

Selection (seconds)

1.5

✓

4.0


Ringing Pattern Selection

Single

✓

Selection

Double Triple

Selection

Default

Change

[500] DISA Incoming

Dialing Mode Selection

Without AA

✓

With AA

[502]

OGM Mode Selection

MODE 1

✓

MODE 2

[503] FAX Connection

Extension jack no. (01…24) / Disable

Disable

[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant

Selection

Jack: Extension jack no. (01…24)

All: Not stored

GRP: Ring group no. (1…8)

Auto attendant no.

Default

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

8

9

Selection

Default

Change

[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time

0 sec 3 sec

✓

6 sec 12 sec

[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM

0 sec 5 sec

✓

10 sec 15 sec



Selection

Default

Change

[506]

DISA Busy Mode

[507] DISA

Intercept Mode

Disconnect Call Waiting

✓

DISA 2 Intercept

✓

[508]

DISA Ringing Time before Intercept

Disconnect 10 sec 20 sec

✓

30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec

Selection

Default

Change

[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept

10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec

✓

[510] DISA No Dial Mode

DISA 1

Intercept

✓

Disconnect Intercept

✓

DISA 2

Disconnect

Selection

Default

[511] DISA Security Type [512] DISA Security Codes

Trunk

✓

All None

[513] Cyclic Tone Detection

0…9, 4 digit

All codes = Not stored

CODE=01 CODE=02 CODE=03 CODE=04

Disable 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times

✓

Change

Selection

Default

Change

[514] FAX

Tone Detection

1 Time

✓

2 Times

[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA

3 sec

✓

6 sec 9 sec 1 sec

[517]

DISA AA Wait Time

2 sec

✓

3 sec 4 sec 5 sec

Extension jack no.

Default: All

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

Enable

✓

Selection

Disable

[516] DISA Incoming Assignment

Extension jack no.

12

13

14

15

09

10

11

16

17

Selection

Enable Disable

Extension jack no.

21

22

23

24

*

18

19

20

Selection

Enable Disable



Selection

Default

Change

[518] DISA Tone Selection after the Security Code

Enable

✓

Disable

Extension jack no.

12

13

14

15

08

09

10

11

Default: All

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

20

21

22

23

24

*

16

17

18

19

[601] TRS – Class of Service

(COS) Assignment — Day

1

✓

COS no. (1…5)

2 3 4 5


(COS) Assignment — Night

1

✓

COS no. (1…5)

2 3 4 5


(COS) Assignment — Lunch

1

✓

COS no. (1…5)

2 3 4 5


7

Extension jack no.

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

Default: All

01

02

03

04

05

06

19

20

21

22

23

24

*

15

16

17

18


Option

✓

[605]

Account Code Entry Mode

Forced

Selection

Verify-All Verify-Toll

[606] Call Transfer to Outside (CO) Line

Enable

Selection

Disable

✓



Extension jack no.

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

Default: All

01

02

03

04

05

06

19

20

21

22

23

24

*

15

16

17

18

[607] Call Forwarding to an Outside (CO) Line

Selection

Enable Disable

✓

[608] Executive

Busy Override

Selection

Enable Disable

✓

[609] Do Not

Disturb Override

Selection

Enable Disable

✓

[610] Paralleled

Telephone Connection

Selection

Enable Disable

✓



Extension jack no.

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

Default: All

01

02

03

04

05

06

19

20

21

22

23

24

*

15

16

17

18

[611]

TAM Extension

Selection

Enable Disable

✓

[612] Room Monitor

Assignment

Selection

Enable Disable

✓

[617] Wireless PT

Port Assignment

Not Connect

✓

Selection

Connect



Extension jack no.

Default: All

E

✓

1

D

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20

[700] Doorphone Ringing

Assignment — Day

E

✓

2

D

E

✓

3

D


Assignment — Night


Assignment — Lunch

E

✓

1…4: Doorphone no., E: Enable / D: Disable

4 1 2 3 4 1

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

2

D

E

✓

3

D

E

✓

4

D



Extension jack no.

Default: All

E

✓

1

D

13

14

15

16

09

10

11

12

05

06

07

08

01

02

03

04

21

22

23

24

*

17

18

19

20

[703] Door Opener

Assignment — Day

E

✓

2

D

E

✓

3

D


Assignment — Night

E

✓

1…4: Door opener no., E: Enable / D: Disable

4 1 2 3 4 1

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D

E

✓

D


Assignment — Lunch

E

✓

2

D

E

✓

3

D

E

✓

4

D



Doorphone no.

Default: All

1

2

3

4

*


/ Tone Pattern Selection

Single

Selection

Double Triple

✓

S-Double

[707] Doorphone

Access Tone Selection

Enable

✓

Selection

Disable

Door opener no.

Default: All

1

2

3

4

*

1 sec 2 sec

[709] Door Opener Time

3 sec

Selection

4 sec 5 sec

✓

6 sec

[708] Doorphone

Ringing Time

15 sec

✓

Selection

30 sec

7 sec 8 sec

[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters

Selection

New line code

CR+LF

✓

Baud rate

CR 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600

✓

Default

Change

Word length

7 8

✓

Parity bit

Stop bit

Mark

✓

Space Even Odd None 1

✓

2

[801] SMDR Parameter

Default Selection

Page length

(4…99)

Skip perforation

(0…95)

66

0

[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing

Default

✓

Selection

Incoming calls

Outgoing calls

On

Off

On

Off

Toll

✓



Selection

Default

Change

[803] Secret Speed Dialing /

One-Touch Dialing Printing

No Printing

✓

Printing

[805]

SMDR Account Code Selection

CODE

✓

Selection

Enable

Disable

Default

All

✓

1

[900] Caller ID Assignment

2 3 4

CODE no.

Default

1

2

3

4

5

[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment

Parameter: 6 digits max., 0 – 9

All: Not stored

Selection

Number of digits to be deleted

(0…9, 0: no deletion)

Number to be added

(4 digits max.)

[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls

Default Change

3 blank

(not stored)

5

INDEX

6

[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls

Default

0

1

Change



Extension jack no.

Default: All

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

Number

[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection

Selection

Name

✓

Extension jack no.

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

21

22

23

24

Selection

Default

Change

[906] Caller ID SMDR Format

Without CID With CID

✓

Number

Selection

Name


Panasonic Consumer Electronics

Company, Division of Matsushita

Electric Corporation of America

One Panasonic Way, Secaucus,

New Jersey 07094

Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),

Division of Matsushita Electric of

Puerto Rico, Inc.

Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5,

San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,

Puerto Rico 00985

Copyright:

This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be reproduced in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee.

C 1999 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

Printed in the United Kingdom

PSQX1424WA

KW0698KM6020APC (M)